Handbook

Your vehicle lives on the Internet!

Access the latest information available.
PEUGEOT's SERVICE BOX Internet site permits easy
and free consultation of your vehicle documentation Connect to http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com:
on line.
Simple and user friendly, SERVICE BOX allows you access:
select your language,

click on the link in the "Private customer access"

● to your Handbook, zone to consult the Vehicle documentation,
A window opens giving access to all of the handbooks...
● to previous Vehicle documentation.

select your vehicle,

choose its body type then the date of publication
of the handbook,

finally, click on the item which is of interest to you.

Please note the following point:

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure
of your vehicle’s electronic system. Please note this specific warning. It is advisable to contact a PEUGEOT dealer
to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.
 WELCOME

Key
Thank you for choosing a 5008, a symbol
of confidence, passion and inspiration. Warning:
this symbol marks warnings
which it is essential to observe
This handbook has been designed to for your own safety, for the safety of
enable you to make the most of your others or to avoid any risk of damaging
5008. your vehicle.

On the first few pages, you will find a de-

tailed summary, followed by a quick refer- Information:
ence guide intended to make it easier for
you to become familiar with your vehicle. this symbol draws your atten-
tion to additional information
All of the details specific to your 5008, for better use of your vehicle.
comfort, safety, driving, are then pre-
sented in this handbook, to increase
your appreciation of the vehicle and to
help you make the most of it
Protection of
At the end of the handbook, illustra- the environment:
tions of the interior and exterior of the
vehicle will assist you in locating equip- this symbol accompanies
ment or a function by means of the advice relating to protection of the en-
page indexed. vironment.
Each model may only be fitted with
some of the equipment mentioned in Page reference:
this handbook, depending on the trim
level, model, version and the specifica- this symbol invites you to refer
tion for the country in which it is sold. to the pages which provide de-
tails of the function.
CONTENTS

FAMILIARISATION 4-24 COMFORT 58-75 FITTINGS 102-115

Heating and Ventilation .................. 58 Interior fittings ............................... 102
Manual air conditioning .................. 60 Centre console ............................. 104
Rear screen demist/defrost ............ 61 Rear multimedia ........................... 107
Dual-zone digital air conditioning ... 62 Panoramic sunrooff ....................... 108
Front seats ..................................... 65 Boot fittings 5 seat version ........... 109
Rear seats, 2nd row ....................... 69 Boot fittings 7 seat version ............110
ECO-DRIVING 25-26 Access to the 3rd row..................... 71
Rear seats, 3rd row........................ 72
Seat modularity .............................. 73
Mirrors ............................................ 74
Steering wheel adjustment ............. 75

INSTRUMENTS
and CONTROLS 27-41
Instrument panels........................... 27
Indicator and warning lamps .......... 29
Indicators ........................................ 37 CHILD
Adjustment buttons......................... 41
ACCESS 76-90 SAFETY 116-127
Remote control key ........................ 76 Child seats.....................................116
Alarm .............................................. 81 ISOFIX child seats........................ 123
Electric windows............................. 83 Child lock...................................... 127
Doors .............................................. 85
MULTIFUNCTION Boot ................................................ 87
SCREENS 42-57 Fuel tank......................................... 89
Misfuel prevention .......................... 90
Screen A without audio equipmentt .... 42
Screen A with audio equipment...... 44
Screen C
(Peugeot Connect Sound)............ 46
16/9 retractable colour screen VISIBILITY 91-101 SAFETY 128-139
(Peugeot Connect Navigation
(RNEG)) ....................................... 49 Lighting controls ............................. 91 Direction indicators....................... 128
16/9 high definition retractable Automatic illumination Hazard warning lamps.................. 128
colour screen of headlamps................................ 94 Horn.............................................. 128
(Peugeot Connect Media) ............ 51 Headlamp adjustment .................... 94 Tyre under-inflation detection ....... 129
Trip computerr ................................. 54 Directional lighting .......................... 95 ESC system.................................. 130
Wiper controls ................................ 96 Front seat belts............................. 132
Automatic rain sensitive wipers...... 98 Airbags ......................................... 136
Courtesy lamps .............................. 99
Interior mood lighting .................... 100
 CONTENTS
PRACTICAL AUDIO EQUIPMENT
DRIVING 140-170 INFORMATION 179-213 and TELEMATICS 223-324
Electric parking brake................... 140 Temporary puncture repair kit ...... 179 Emergency or assistance ............. 223
Hill start assist .............................. 145 Changing a wheel......................... 188 Peugeot Connect Media ............... 227
Head-up display ........................... 148 Changing a bulb ........................... 194 Peugeot Connect Navigation
Distance alert ............................... 150 Changing a fuse ........................... 199 (RNEG)....................................... 271
Speed limiterr ................................ 152 12 V Battery.................................. 206 Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) ... 303
Cruise control ............................... 154 Energy economy mode ................ 208
Manual gearbox............................ 156 Changing a wiper blade ............... 208
Gear efficiency indicator...............
r 156 Towing the vehicle ........................ 209
6-speed electronic gear control Towing a trailerr ............................. 210
gearbox ...................................... 157 Fitting roof bars .............................211
Automatic gearbox ....................... 161 Very cold climate screen .............. 212
Stop & Start .................................. 164 Accessories .................................. 213 ALPHABETICAL
Parking sensors ............................ 167
Parking space sensors ................. 169 INDEX 325-329

CHECKS 171-178 VISUAL

Bonnet .......................................... 172 SEARCH 330-334
Running out of fuel (Diesel).......... 173
Petrol engines .............................. 174
Diesel engines.............................. 175
Checking levels ............................ 176 TECHNICAL
Checks.......................................... 177 DATA 214-222
Petrol engines .............................. 214
Petrol weights............................... 215
Diesel engines.............................. 216
Diesel weights .............................. 217
Dimensions ................................... 221
Identification markings.................. 222
 EXTERIOR
Panoramic sunroof
This roof provides incomparable visibility
Stop & Start and light in the passenger compartment.
This system puts the engine temporarily
into standby during stops in the traffic (red
lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine re- 108
starts automatically as soon as you want
to move off. The Stop & Start system
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions and provides the comfort of
complete silence when stationary

164

Welcome lighting Directional lighting

This additional exterior and interior lighting, This lighting automatically provides addi-
controlled remotely, makes your approach tional visibility when cornering.
to the vehicle easier when the light is poor.
FAM

93 95

4
EXTERIOR
When washing your vehicle in a car
wash:
- remove the aerial,
Parking space sensor
- fold back the mirrors.
This system measures the size of the
parking space available between two ve-
hicles or obstacles.

169

Temporary puncture repair kit Visual and audible front and/or rear
This kit is a complete system, consisting parking sensors
of a compressor and an integrated seal- This system warns you if an obstacle is
ant product, for the temporary repair of detected behind or in front of the vehicle
a tyre. in reverse or forward gear.

179 167

5
 OPENING
Remote control key Welcome lighting Fuel tank

A. Unfolding/Folding the key. When the light is poor, detected by a sen- 1. Opening the fuel filler flap.
sor, the remote switching on of the dipped 2. Opening and hooking the fuel filler
Normal locking beam headlamps and sidelamps makes cap.
your approach to the vehicle easier.
(press once; fixed lighting of
the direction indicators). This function can be programmed via
the configuration menu. The type of fuel to be used is indicated
on the inner face of the fuel filler flap.
or Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
93
Deadlocking the vehicle
(press twice in succession; 89
fixed lighting of the direction
indicators).

On Diesel vehicles, the fuel

Complete or selective unlocking filler neck incorporates a mis-
of the vehicle fuel prevention device which
prevents filling with petrol.
(rapid flashing of the direction
FAM

indicators).

76

6
OPENING
Boot Panoramic sunroof

1. Unlocking the vehicle. 1. Opening the blind. 2. Closing the blind.

2. Opening the boot.

87 108

FAM
7
 INTERIOR

Electric parking brake

Head-up display
This combines the functions of automatic
This system projects certain information application on switching off the engine and
into the field of vision of the driver: speed, automatic release on acceleration.
cruise control/speed limiter and Distance
alert. Manual application/release is possible.

148
140

Audio and communication systems

This equipment benefits from the latest tech-
nology: MP3 compatible Peugeot Connect
Sound (RD5), Peugeot Connect USB, Blue-
tooth, Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG)
or Peugeot Connect Media Navigation
(RT6) with 16/9 retractable colour screen,
JBL audio system, auxiliary sockets.

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

Peugeot Connect 227 250, This system allows different levels of
Peugeot Connect USB 310
Media Navigation (RT6) comfort to be set for the driver and front
passenger. It then controls these levels
255, automatically according to the ambient
FAM

Peugeot Connect 271 Bluetooth 291, conditions.

Navigation (RNEG) 313
62
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) 303 PEUGEOT 223
Assistance
8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Audio and telematics system
steering mounted control stalk.
2. Steering lock and ignition.
3. Wipers/screenwash/trip computer
control stalk.
4. Instrument panel.
5. Driver’s airbag.
Horn.
6. Gear lever.
7. Electric parking brake.
8. 12 V accessory socket.
9. Centre console.
10. Panoramic sunroof control.
11. Handbook storage compartment.
12. Manual headlamp adjustment.
Instrument panel navigator
associated with the Peugeot
Connect Media Navigation (RT6).
13. Alarm switch.
Parking sensors switch.
Dynamic stability control switch
(ESP/ASR).
Stop & Start deactivation switch.
14. Door mirror controls.
Electric window controls.
Child lock.
15. Front door window demist/defrost
vent.
16. Windscreen demist/defrost vent.

FAM
9
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Steering wheel adjustment.
2. Cruise control/speed limiter
switches.
3. Lighting and direction indicator
control stalk.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Head-up display.
6. Multifunction screen.
7. Passenger’s airbag.
8. Side adjustable air vent.
9. Glove box - Audio/video sockets -
Passenger’s airbag deactivation.
10. Bonnet release.
11. 12 V accessory socket.
12. Heating/air conditioning controls.
13. Audio and telematics system.
14. Switches:
- head-up display,
- hazard warning lamps,
- Distance alert,
- central locking.
FAM

10
SITTING COMFORTABLY
Driver's seat
Forwards-backwards Height Seat back angle

Manual adjustment
65

Electric adjustment
66

FAM
11
 SITTING COMFORTABLY Steering wheel adjustment Centre console
Front seats
Head restraint height and angle

1. Releasing the adjustment mechanism. This has a large storage area (with re-
cesses for 2 bottles, ...) for the front
2. Adjustment of height and reach. passengers and, according to version,
3. Locking the adjustment mechanism. a multimedia system for the rear pas-
sengers.
Lumbar
As a safety precaution, these operations 104,
must only be carried out when stationary. 107

75
FAM

67

12
SITTING COMFORTABLY Rear view mirror Front seat belts
Door mirrors

Manual model
1. Selection of the "day" position of the 1. Fastening the buckle.
mirror.
Adjustment
2. Adjustment of the mirror.
A. Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.
B. Adjustment of the position of the 75
mirror in the four directions.

74

Also...
2. Height adjustment.
C. Folding/
Unfolding.
132
Automatic day/night model
1. Adjustment of the mirror.

75

13
 SEEING CLEARLY
Lighting Direction indicators Wipers

Ring A Raise or lower the lighting stalk passing Stalk A: windscreen wipers
the point of resistance; the corresponding
Lighting off. direction indicators will flash for as long as Switching on "AUTO"
the stalk remains in this position. ) Press the stalk down and release it.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Sidelamps. "Motorway" function Switching off "AUTO"
Press the lighting stalk up or down once, ) Push the stalk up and return it to po-
Dipped/main beam headlamps. without passing the point of resistance; sition "0".
the corresponding direction indicators
91 will flash three times.
This function can be used at any speed, 98
Ring B but it is particularly useful when changing
lane on high-speed roads.
Ring B: rear wiper
Rear foglamp.
Park.
or 128 Intermittent wipe.
FAM

Wash-wipe.
Front and rear foglamps.
97
92

14
VENTILATION
Recommended interior settings

Heating or Manual Air Conditioning

I require... Air recirculation/

Air distribution Air flow Temperature Manual A/C
Intake of outside air

HOT

COLD

DEMISTING
DEFROSTING

FAM
Digital air conditioning: we recommend use of the fully automatic mode by pressing the "AUTO" button.

15
 MONITORING Switch panels
Instrument panel Lower

Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the

status of the corresponding function.
A. Parking space 169
sensors.
B. Deactivation of Stop & 165
Start.
C. Volumetric alarm. 81
D. Visual and audible
parking sensors. 167

E. ESP OFF. 131

F. Child lock. 127

A. With the ignition on, the needle 1. With the ignition on, the orange and
should indicate the level of fuel re- red warning lamps come on. Central
maining. 2. With the engine running, these
B. With the engine running, its associated warning lamps should go off.
low level warning lamp should go off. If warning lamps remain on, refer to the
C. With the ignition on, the oil level indicator page concerned.
should display "OIL OK" for a few seconds.
If the levels are not correct, top up the 29
levels which are low. 148
G. Head-up display.

H. Hazard warning lamps. 128

27
FAM

I. Distance alert. 150

J. Central locking. 86

16
PASSENGER SAFETY
Passenger's front airbag Child lock
front airbag (locking of the rear doors)

1. Insert the key. A. Front and/or rear seat belts not fas- Lighting of the indicator lamp indicates the
2. Select the position: tened/unfastened warning lamp. status of the corresponding function.
"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" B. Front left seat belt warning lamp.
child seat, C. Front right seat belt warning lamp. 127
"ON" (activation), with front passenger D. Rear right seat belt warning lamp.
or "forwards facing" child seat. E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
3. Remove the key keeping the switch F. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
in the new position.
G. Passenger's front airbag deactivated
warning lamp.
H. Passenger's front airbag activated
137 warning lamp.

133

7 seat version (3rd row)

FAM
I. Rear right seat belt warning
lamp.
J. Rear left seat belt warning
lamp.
17
 ARRANGING YOUR SEATS 7 SEAT VERSION

Folding the seats in the 2nd row Putting the seats back in place Access to the 3rd row seats

) Raise the seat back and push it

rearwards until it locks.

) Pull the strap A upwards firmly to re- Rigid panel ) Close the aircraft style tables on the
lease the seat and continue to pull 2nd row seats if they are open.
until the seat is fully folded. ) Hold the control D up, the seat is
released and the seat base rises to
the seat back.
) Push the seat back forwards, holding
From the boot the control D forwards.
) Pull the strap B to release the seat
and push the seat back forwards
gently.

70 71

) After folding the seats, slide the

catch C.
FAM

71

18
ARRANGING YOUR SEATS (7 SEAT VERSION)

Changing from 5 to 7 seats

) Place the rigid panels of the 2nd row ) Pull the strap E and guide the seat ) Lower the head restraints and place
seats upright and lock them then fold until the assembly locks. the concertina board in the vertical
the concertina boards rearwards. ) Fold the concertina boards forwards. position behind the seat.
) Remove the load space cover and ) While pulling the strap F, push the
store it in its housing. seat back forwards gently.
) Remove the load space screen from
72, its storage compartment and position
111 it behind the 2nd row seats.

FAM
72,
111

19
 DRIVING SAFELY
Stop & Start

Going into engine STOP mode Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes The "ECO" warning lamp goes
on in the instrument panel and the off and the engine restarts with
engine automatically goes into a 6-speed electronic gear
standby, with a 6-speed elec- control gearbox:
tronic gear control gearbox: at speeds - gear lever in position A or M, release
below 5 mph (8 km/h), press the brake the brake pedal,
pedal or put the gear lever in position N.
- or with the gear lever in position N
and the brake pedal released, move
In some circumstances, STOP mode may the gear lever to position A or M,
not be available; the "ECO" warning lamp - or engage reverse gear.
flashes for few seconds, then goes off.

In some circumstances START mode Deactivation/Reactivation

may be invoked automatically; the You can deactivate the system at any
"ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few time by pressing the "ECO OFF" but-
seconds, then goes off. ton; the warning lamp in the button
comes on.

The system is reactivated au-

tomatically at every new start
using the key.

Before refuelling or doing any-

thing under the bonnet, you
must switch off the ignition us-
ing the key.
FAM

165

20
DRIVING SAFELY
Electric parking brake

Manual application/release Automatic application/release Before getting out of the

The parking brake can be applied man- Press the accelerator, press and and re- vehicle, check that the
ually by pulling the control lever A. lease the clutch (manual gearbox), the braking warning lamp
parking brake is released automatically (red!) and the warning
When the ignition is on, the parking lamp P, located in the control lever A
brake can be released manually by and progressively on acceleration.
are on fixed (not flashing).
pressing the brake pedal and pulling With the vehicle stationary, when the
then releasing the control lever A. engine is switched off, the parking
brake is applied automatically.

If this warning lamp is on in

the instrument panel, the auto- If you are towing a trailer or
matic application/release is de- a caravan or if the gradient
activated, in this case use the is likely to change (transport
manual application/release. by ship, lorry, towing, ...), ap-
ply the parking brake manually to
When the door is opened with maximum force (long pull on control
the engine running an audible lever A) to immobilise the vehicle.
signal is heard, apply the parking
brake manually.

FAM
Do not leave a child alone in the ve-
hicle with the ignition on, they could
release the parking brake. 140

21
 DRIVING SAFELY
Hill start assist Head-up display Distance alert

Your vehicle is equipped with a system

which keeps it immobile for a short time
(approximately 2 seconds) to assist you
when starting on a hill, the time required
for you to move your foot from the brake 1. Head-up display on/off. 1. Distance alert on/off.
pedal to the accelerator pedal. 2. Brightness adjustment. 2. Alert value increase/decrease.
This system only operates: 3. Display height adjustment.
- when the vehicle has been com-
pletely stopped with your foot on the
brake pedal, 150
148
- on certain gradients,
- when the driver's door is closed.

Do not get out of the vehicle The adjustments must be

during the hill start assist tem- made with the engine running
porary holding phase. and the vehicle stationary.
FAM

145

22
DRIVING SAFELY
Speed limiter "LIMIT" Cruise control "CRUISE" Display in the instrument panel

1. Limiter mode Selection/Off. 1. Cruise control mode Selection/Off.

2. Decrease the programmed value. 2. Programme a speed/Decrease the
3. Increase the programmed value. programmed value.
4. Speed limiter On/Off. 3. Programme a speed/Increase the
programmed value.
4. Cruise control Off/Resume.

The values must be set with

the engine running. The cruise control or speed limiter mode
In order to be programmed or appears on the instrument panel when
activated, the vehicle speed it is selected.
must be higher than 25 mph
(40 km/h), with at least fourth gear
engaged on the manual gearbox
(second gear for the 6-speed elec- Cruise control
152
tronic gear control gearbox or auto-
matic gearbox).

FAM
Speed limiter
154

23
 DRIVING SAFELY
6-speed electronic gear control gearbox "Porsche Tiptronic System"
automatic gearbox
This 6-speed electronic gear control
gearbox offers a choice between the
comfort of fully automatic operation or
the pleasure of manual gear changing.

This six-speed gearbox offers a choice

between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual
gear changing.
1. Gear lever.
1. Gear lever. 3. Steering mounted "-" paddle. 2. Button "S" (sport).
2. Button "S" (sport). 4. Steering mounted "+" paddle. 3. Button "7" (snow).

Moving off Moving off

) Select position N and press the ) Select position P or N and press the
brake pedal firmly while starting the brake pedal firmly while starting the
engine. engine.
) Engage first gear (position A or M) ) Select position R, D or M.
or reverse (position R) using the ) Take your foot off the brake pedal,
gear lever 1. then accelerate.
) Take your foot off the brake pedal
then accelerate.
FAM

161
157

24
 ECO-DRIVING
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.

Optimise the use of your Control the use of your electrical equipment
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently, Before moving off, if the passenger Switch off the headlamps and front
change up without waiting and drive by compartment is too warm, ventilate it by foglamps when the level of light does
changing up quite soon. If your vehicle opening the windows and air vents be- not require their use.
has the system, the gear efficiency indi- fore using the air conditioning.
cator invites you to change up; it is dis- Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the win-
played in the instrument panel, follow its dows and leave the air vents open. Avoid running the engine before moving
instructions. off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will
Remember to make use of equipment
that can help keep the temperature in warm up much faster while driving.
the passenger compartment down (sun
roof and window blinds...).
With an automatic or electronic gear- Switch off the air conditioning, unless As a passenger, if you avoid connect-
box, stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A", ac- it has automatic digital regulation, as ing your multimedia devices (film, music,
cording to the type of gearbox, without soon as the desired temperature is at- video game...), you will contribute towards
pressing the accelerator pedal heavily tained. limiting the consumption of electrical en-
or suddenly. ergy, and so of fuel.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic. Disconnect your portable devices be-
Switch off the heated seat as soon as fore leaving the vehicle.
Drive smoothly possible.
Maintain a safe distance between ve-
hicles, use engine braking rather than
the brake pedal, and press the accel-
erator progressively. These practices
contribute towards a reduction in fuel
consumption and CO2 emissions and
also helps reduce the background traf-
fic noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make

use of the system at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

25
 Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations
consumption on maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; Check the tyre pressures regularly, When refuelling, do not continue after
place the heaviest items in the bottom when cold, referring to the label in the the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid
of the boot, as close as possible to the door aperture, driver's side. any overflow.
rear seats. Carry out this check in particular:
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle - before a long journey,
and reduce wind resistance (roof bars,
roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use - at each change of season, At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
a roof box in preference. - after a long period out of use. after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilome-
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tres) that you will see the fuel consumption
Remove roof bars and roof racks after settle down to a consistent average.
use. tyres on any trailer or caravan.

At the end of winter, remove snow

tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (en-
gine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the
schedule of operations recommended by
the manufacturer.

26
INSTRUMENT PANELS Dials
1. Rev counter.
Indicates the engine speed (x 1 000 rpm).
2. Coolant temperature.
Indicates the temperature of the en-
gine coolant (° Celsius).
3. Fuel level.
Indicates the quantity of fuel remaining
in the tank.
4. Speedometer.
Indicates the current speed of the
moving vehicle (mph or km/h).
5. Screen.
6. Display zero reset or service indi-
cator re-display button.
Resets the selected function to zero
(trip distance recorder or service in-
dicator) or displays the service indi-
cator again.
7. Instrument panel lighting dimmer.
Adjusts the brightness of the light-
ing of the instruments and controls,
if the vehicle lighting is on.

For more information, refer to

the paragraph relating to the
Panel grouping together the vehicle operation indication dials and warning lamps.

INS
button or function and its as-
sociated display.

27
 Screen(s) C. Service indicator.
(miles or km) or,
Engine oil level indicator.
or
distance recorder.
(miles or km)
D. 6-speed electronic gear control
or automatic gearbox.
E. Warning messages and function
status messages, trip computer,
GPS navigation information, menus
(with Peugeot Connect Media).

Instrument panel navigator associated Controls

with the Peugeot Connect Media
There are four buttons to control the
large 16/9 screen in the instrument
panel:
1. access the main menu, confirm the
selection,
2. move up through the menu,
3. move down through the menu,
4. return to the previous display, exit
from the menu.

A. Speed limiter
or
Cruise control. This group of buttons permits:
(mph or km/h) - when stationary, configuration of the
vehicle's equipment and the screen
B. Trip distance recorder. settings (languages, units...),
INS

(miles or km) - while driving, scrolling of the active

functions (trip computer, naviga-
tion...).
 Vehicle parameters Indicator and warning lamps
The main menu and its asso-
ciated functions can only be Visual indicators informing the driver
accessed when stationary, via that a system is in operation (operation
buttons 1 to 4. or deactivation indicator lamps) or of the
A message appears on the screen, occurrence of a fault (warning lamp).
above a certain speed threshold, in-
dicating that the main menu cannot
be displayed.
The trip computer displays can only When the ignition is switched on
be accessed while driving, via but- Certain warning lamps come on for a
tons 2 and 3 (refer to the "Trip com- few seconds when the vehicle's ignition
puter" paragraph). is switched on.
This menu allows you to activate or
deactivate certain driving and comfort When the engine is started, these same
equipment (according to country): warning lamps should go off.
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
Main menu to the "Visibility" section), information on the warning lamp concerned.
) Press button 1 for access to the - selective unlocking (refer to the
main menu and select one of the fol- "Access" section), Associated warnings
lowing functions: - guide-me-home and welcome light- The illumination of certain warning lamps
- "Vehicle parameters", ing (refer to the "Visibility" section), may be accompanied by an audible signal
- "Choice of language", - interior mood lighting (refer to the and a message in the multifunction screen.
"Visibility" section),
- "Choice of units".
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
) Press button 2 or 3 to move in the "Visibility" section),
screen. The warning lamps may come
- directional headlamps (refer to the
) Press button 1 again to confirm the "Visibility" section), on continuously (fixed) or flash.
selection. Certain warning lamps may
- automatic or manual parking brake
(refer to the "Driving" section). come on in two different modes. Only
by relating the type of illumination to
Choice of language the operating status of the vehicle
This menu allows you to select the can it be ascertained whether the
display language: Deutsch, English, situation is normal or whether a fault
Espanol, Français, Italiano, Nederlands, has occurred.
Portugues, Türkçe*.
Choice of units
This menu allows you to select the

INS
units: temperature (°Celsius or °Fahr-
enheit) and fuel consumption (l/100 km,
mpg or km/l).
* According to country.
29
 Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Left-hand flashing The lighting stalk is pushed

direction with buzzer. down.
indicator
Right-hand flashing The lighting stalk is pushed
direction with buzzer. up.
indicator

The lighting stalk is in

Sidelamps fixed. the "Sidelamps" position.

The lighting stalk is in the

Dipped beam fixed. "Dipped beam headlamps"
headlamps position.

Main beam The lighting stalk is pulled Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam
fixed.
headlamps towards you. headlamps.

Front The front foglamps are Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice
fixed.
foglamps switched on. to switch off the front foglamps.

Rear The rear foglamps are Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off
fixed.
foglamps switched on. the rear foglamps.

Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
Diesel engine The ignition switch is at the
fixed. The duration for which the warning lamp is on is
pre-heating 2nd position (ignition on).
determined by the climatic conditions.
Release the electric parking brake to switch off
the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake
Electric The electric parking brake is pedal, pull the electric brake control.
INS

fixed.
parking brake applied. Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking
brake, refer to the "Driving" section.
30
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Deactivation The "automatic application"

of the (on switching off the engine) Activate the function (according to country) via
automatic fixed. and "automatic release" the vehicle configuration menu or contact a
functions of functions are deactivated or PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
the electric faulty.
parking brake

Press the brake pedal to start the engine with

the 6-speed electronic gear control gearbox
(lever in position N) or automatic gearbox
The brake pedal must be (lever in position P).
fixed. pressed.
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will
Foot on the remain on.
brake pedal
In the case of an electronic
gear control gearbox, if you Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking
flashing. hold the vehicle on an incline brake.
using the accelerator for too
long, the clutch overheats.

The parking space sensors

fixed. function is active. Press the corresponding button to deactivate it.
Parking space
sensors
The system is measuring the Once the measurement has been done, the
flashing. space. warning lamp comes on fixed again.

When the vehicle stops (red The warning lamp goes off and the engine
lights, traffic jams, ...) the
fixed. restarts automatically in START mode, as soon
Stop & Start system has put as you want to move off.
the engine into STOP mode.
Stop & Start STOP mode is temporarily
flashes
for a few unavailable.

INS
Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start" for special
seconds, or cases with STOP mode and START mode.
then goes START mode is invoked
off. automatically.
31
 Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

The control, located in the

glove box, is set to the OFF
position. Set the control to the ON position to activate the
Passenger's passenger's front airbag.
fixed. The passenger's front airbag
airbag system is deactivated. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the
rear-facing position.
In this case you can install a
"rear facing" child seat.

The button, located at

the bottom right of the Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR. Its
dashboard, is pressed. Its indicator lamp switches off.
indicator lamp is on. The ESP/ASR system is activated automatically
ESP/ASR fixed. The ESP/ASR is deactivated. when the vehicle is started.
ESP: electronic stability If it has been deactivated, the system is
programme. reactivated automatically from approximately
30 mph (50 km/h).
ASR: anti-skid regulation.
INS

32
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, the illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a
fault which requires action on the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further by reading the associated message in
the multifunction screen.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

fixed, alone or Illumination of this warning Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as

associated with lamp is associated with a there is a risk that the engine will cut out
another warning lamp, serious braking system, power while driving.
STOP accompanied by an steering, engine lubrication or
audible signal and a cooling system malfunction or Park, switch off the ignition and contact a
message in the screen. a punctured tyre. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message

shown in the screen, such as, for
example:
- the closing of the doors, boot or bonnet,
- the engine oil level,
A minor fault has occurred - the screenwash level,
on temporarily. for which there is no specific - the remote control battery,
warning lamp. - the tyre pressures,
Service - saturation of the particle emission
filter (Diesel).
- ...
For any other faults, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message

A major fault has occurred shown on the screen and contact
fixed. for which there is no specific a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
warning lamp. workshop.
fixed, associated As soon as traffic conditions allow,
This indicates the start of
(PEF: temporarily with a regenerate the filter by driving at a
saturation of the particle
particle message on the risk of speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h) until
emissions filter.

INS
emissions blockage of the PEF. the service warning lamp goes off.
filter, Diesel) This indicates the low level in Have the level topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer
fixed. the Diesel additive reservoir. or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
 Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Electric The application or release
parking flashing. of the electric parking brake Park on level ground, switch off the
brake was interrupted. ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.

Automatic application/release is no
longer possible.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop without delay.
Electric The electric parking brake The parking brake can be released
+ parking brake fixed. has a fault. manually using the emergency release
malfunction
procedure.
For more information on the electric
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by
fixed, associated with The braking system PEUGEOT.
the STOP warning fluid level has dropped If the problem persists, have the system
lamp. significantly. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with You must stop as soon as it is safe
Braking the electric parking to do so.
brake malfunction The braking system has
+ Park, switch off the ignition and contact
warning lamp, if the a fault.
parking brake is a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
released. workshop.

fixed, associated with The electronic brake force You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
+ the STOP and ABS distribution (EBFD) system Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
warning lamps. has a fault. or a qualified workshop.
The vehicle retains conventional
Anti-lock braking.
INS

Braking The anti-lock braking system

fixed. Drive carefully at reduced speed
System has a fault.
(ABS) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop without delay.

34
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

The system optimises traction and

The ESP/ASR regulation is
flashing. improves the directional stability of the
Dynamic active. vehicle.
stability
control Unless it has been
(ESP/ASR) deactivated (button pressed Have it checked by a PEUGEOT or a
fixed. and its indicator lamp on) the qualified workshop.
ESP/ASR system has a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the
The emission control system engine is started.
fixed.
Engine has a fault. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT
autodiagnosis dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
system
The engine management Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it
flashing. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
system has a fault.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out of fuel.
When it first comes on there This warning lamp will come on every
remains approximately 6 litres time the ignition is switched on, until a
Low fuel fixed with the needle of fuel in the tank. sufficient addition of fuel is made.
level in the red zone.
At this point, you begin to Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres.
use the fuel reserve. Never continue to drive until you run
out of fuel, as this could damage the
emission control and injection systems.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Maximum Wait until the engine has cooled down
fixed with the needle The temperature of the
coolant before topping up the level, if necessary.
in the red zone. cooling system is too high.
temperature If the problem persists, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.

INS
Engine oil There is a fault with the
fixed. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a
pressure engine lubrication system.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
 Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

The battery charging circuit The warning lamp should go off when
Battery has a fault (dirty or loose the engine is started.
fixed.
charge terminals, slack or cut If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT
alternator belt, ...). dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed if the speed is

below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door, the boot, the lower
Door(s) tailgate or the bonnet Close the door or boot.
open fixed and accompanied
by an audible signal (with alarm only) is still open.
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
Front seat fixed then flashing The driver and/or the front
belt not accompanied by an passenger has not fastened
fastened/ increasing audible or has unfastened their seat
unfastened signal. belt. Pull the strap then insert the tongue in
Rear seat the buckle.
fixed then flashing One or more rear
belt not accompanied by an passengers have unfastened
fastened/ audible signal. their seat belt.
unfastened
This lamp should go off when the engine
This lamp comes on for a few is started.
on temporarily. seconds when you turn on
the ignition, then goes off. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Airbags
One of the airbag or seat belt Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
fixed. pretensioner systems has a or a qualified workshop.
fault.

Risk of damage to the injection system

Water in The Diesel fuel filter contains on Diesel engines.
fixed.
Diesel water. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
INS

qualified workshop without delay.

36
 Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Directional The directional headlamps Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer

flashing.
headlamps system has a fault. or a qualified workshop.

Check the pressure of the tyres as soon

Under- The pressure in one or more as possible.
fixed.
inflated tyre wheels is too low. This check should preferably be carried
out when the tyres are cold.

Coolant temperature indicator

You must stop as soon as it is safe After driving for a few minutes, the tem-
to do so. perature and pressure in the cooling
Wait a few minutes before switching off system increase.
the engine. To top up the level:
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali- ) wait for the engine to cool,
fied workshop. ) unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop,
) when the pressure has dropped,
remove the cap,
) top up the level to the "MAX" mark.

With the engine running, when the nee-

dle is:
- in zone A, the temperature is cor-
rect,
- in zone B, the temperature is too
high; the max temperature warning
lamp 1 and the central STOP warn-
ing lamp come on, accompanied by

INS
an audible signal and a message in
the screen.

37
 Service indicator More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain
remain before the next service is due before the next service is due
System which informs the driver when When the ignition is switched on, no Example: 400 miles (900 km) remain
the next service is due, in accor- service information appears in the before the next service is due.
dance with the manufacturer’s servicing screen.
schedule. For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the screen indicates:
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last indicator zero Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and
reset. It is determined by two para- 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before
meters: the next service is due
- the distance travelled, For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched
- the time elapsed since the last service. on, the spanner symbolising the service op-
erations comes on. The distance recorder
display line indicates the distance remain-
ing before the next service is due.
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) re- 5 seconds after the ignition is switched
main before the next service is due. on, the distance recorder resumes its
normal operation. The spanner re-
For 5 seconds after the ignition is mains on to indicate that a service
switched on, the screen indicates: must be carried out soon.

5 seconds after the ignition is switched

on, the spanner goes off; the distance
recorder resumes its normal operation.
The screen then indicates the total and
trip distances.
INS

38
Service overdue Service indicator zero reset Retrieving the service information
For 5 seconds after the ignition is You can access the service information
switched on, the spanner flashes to at any time.
indicate that the service must be carried ) Press the trip distance recorder zero
out as soon as possible. reset button.
Example: the service is overdue by The service information is displayed
180 miles (300 km). for a few seconds, then disappears.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the screen indicates:

5 seconds after the ignition is switched After each service, the service indicator
on, the distance recorder resumes its must be reset to zero.
normal operation. The spanner re- The procedure for resetting to zero is as
mains on. follows:
) switch off the ignition,
) press and hold the trip distance re-
corder zero reset button,
) switch on the ignition; the distance
recorder display begins a count-
down,
) when the display indicates "=0", re-
The distance remaining may lease the button; the spanner disap-
be weighted by the time fac- pears.
tor, depending on the driving
conditions.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval. Following this operation, if you
wish to disconnect the battery,
lock the vehicle and wait at
least five minutes for the zero reset

INS
to be taken into account.

39
 Engine oil level indicator This information is indicated for a few Oil level indicator fault
seconds when the ignition is switched
System which informs the driver whether on, after the service information.
the engine oil level is correct or not.

The level shown will only be

correct if the vehicle is on level
ground and the engine has been This is indicated by the flashing of
off for more than 30 minutes. "OIL --". Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.

Oil level correct Dipstick

Refer to the "Checks" section to locate
the dipstick and the oil filler cap on your
engine.

There are 2 marks on the

dipstick:
Oil level low
- A = max; never exceed
this level (risk of dam-
age to the engine),

- B = min; top up the level

via the oil filler cap, using
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL", the grade of oil suited to
linked with the service warning lamp, ac- your engine.
companied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a
check using the dipstick, the level must
be topped up to prevent damage to the
INS

engine.
Total distance recorder
In order to observe legislation, Activation
System which measures the total distance change the units of distance
(miles or km) to those for the When the vehicle lighting is on:
travelled by the vehicle during its life.
country you are passing through, us- ) press the button to change the bright-
ing the configuration menu. ness of the instrument panel,
) when the lighting reaches the mini-
mum setting, release the button,
then press again to increase it,
or
) when the lighting reaches the maxi-
Lighting dimmer mum setting, release the button, then
press again to reduce it,
System for manual adjustment of the ) when the lighting reaches the level
brightness of the instrument panel in re- of brightness required, release the
lation to the exterior brightness. button.

The total and trip distances are dis-

played for thirty seconds when the
ignition is switched off, when the driver's
door is opened and when the vehicle is When the vehicle lighting is
locked or unlocked. on, you cannot switch the in-
strument panel lighting off but
you can adjust it to minimum.
Trip distance recorder
System which measures a distance
travelled during a day or other period
since it was reset to zero by the driver.
Deactivation
When the lighting is off, or in day mode
on vehicles fitted with daytime running
lamps, pressing the button does not
have any effect.

INS
) With the ignition on, press the button
until zeros appear.

41
 MONOCHROME SCREEN A Controls Main menu
(WITHOUT AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

) Press the "MENU" button to scroll

through the various menus of the
main menu:
- vehicle configuration,
- options,
- display settings,
- languages,
Displays on the screen There are three display control buttons: - units.
- "ESC" to abandon the operation in ) Press the "OK" button to select the
This displays the following information: progress, menu required.
- time, - "MENU" to scroll through the menus
- date, or sub-menus,
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if - "OK" to select the menu or sub-menu
there is a risk of ice), required.
- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...),
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section).
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission
control system faulty") or information
messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may ap-
pear temporarily. Some can be cleared
by pressing the "ESC" button.
MU

* With air conditioning only.

42
 Options Languages
Once the "Options" menu has been se- Once the "Languages" menu has been
lected, you can start diagnostics of the selected, you can change the language
status of the equipment (active, not ac- used by the display (Français, Italiano,
tive, faulty). Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil,
Türkçe, Deutsch, English, Espanol).
Display settings
Once the "Display settings" menu has
been selected, you can gain access to
the following settings:
Units
- year,
Once the "Units" menu has been selected,
- month, you can change the units for:
- day, - temperature (°C or °F),
Vehicle configuration - hour, - fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.

Once the "Vehicle configuration" menu has

been selected, you can activate or deacti-
vate the following equipment (according to ) Once you have selected a setting,
country): press the "OK" button to change its
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer value.
to the "Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the
"Access" section),
- "guide-me-home" and welcome light-
ing (refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section), ) Wait for approximately ten sec- For safety reasons, configu-
- daytime running lamps (refer to the onds without any action to allow ration of the multifunction
"Visibility" section), the changed data to be recorded or screen by the driver must only
- directional headlamps (refer to the press the "ESC" button to cancel. be done when stationary.
"Visibility" section), The screen then returns to the normal

MU
- automatic or manual parking brake display.
(refer to the "Driving" section),
- ...
43
 MONOCHROME SCREEN A Controls Main menu
(WITH AUDIO EQUIPMENT)

) Press the "MENU" button for access

to the main menu, then press the
" " or " " buttons to scroll through
the various menus:
- radio-CD,
From the audio equipment control panel, - vehicle configuration,
you can: - options,
) press the "MENU" button to gain - display settings,
Displays on the screen access to the main menu, - languages,
) press the " " or " " buttons to scroll - units.
This displays the following information: through the items on the screen, ) Press the "OK" button to select the
- time, ) press the "MODE" button to change menu required.
- date, the permanent application (trip com-
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if puter, audio source, ...),
there is a risk of ice), ) press the " " or " " buttons to Radio-CD
- status of the openings (doors, boot, ...), change a setting value,
) press the "OK" button to confirm, With the audio equipment switched on,
- audio sources (radio, CD, ...), once the "Radio-CD" menu has been
- trip computer (refer to the end of the or selected you can activate or deactivate
section). ) press the "ESC" button to abandon the functions linked with use of the radio
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission the operation in progress. (RDS, REG), the CD or the CD changer
control system faulty") or information (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
messages (e.g.: "Boot open") may ap-
pear temporarily. Some can be cleared
by pressing the "ESC" button.

For more information on the

"Radio-CD" application, refer
to the "Audio and Telematics"
MU

section.

* With air conditioning only.

44
 Display settings Languages
Once the "Display settings" menu has Once the "Languages" menu has been
been selected, you can gain access to selected, you can change the language
the following settings: used by the display (Français, Italiano,
- year, Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-Brasil,
Türkçe, Deutsch, English, Espanol).
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes, Units
Vehicle configuration - 12 or 24 hour mode. Once the "Units" menu has been selected,
you can change the units of the following
parameters:
- temperature (°C or °F),
- fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or
km/l).

Once the "Vehicle Configuration" menu ) Once you have selected a setting,
has been selected, you can activate press the " " or " " buttons to
or deactivate the following equipment change its value.
(according to country):
- wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
to the "Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the
"Access" section),
- guide-me-home and welcome light-
ing (refer to the "Visibility" section),
- interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section), ) Press the " " or " " buttons to
- daytime running lamps (refer to the switch respectively to the previous
"Visibility" section), or next setting.
- directional headlamps (refer to the ) Press the "OK" button to record
"Visibility" section), the change and return to the normal
- automatic or manual parking brake display or press the "ESC" button to For safety reasons, configu-
(refer to the "Driving" section), cancel. ration of the multifunction
- ... screen by the driver must only
be done when stationary.
Options

MU
Once the "Options" menu has been se-
lected, you can start diagnostics of the
status of the equipment (active, not active,
faulty).
45
 MONOCHROME SCREEN C (WITH Controls Main menu
PEUGEOT CONNECT SOUND)

) Press the "MENU" button for access

to the main menu:
- audio functions,
- trip computer (refer to the end of
the section),
From the audio equipment control panel,
you can: - personalisation-configuration,
) press the "MENU" button for access - telephone (Bluetooth system).
to the main menu, ) Press the " " or " " button to se-
Displays in the screen lect the menu required, then confirm
) press the " " or " " buttons to scroll
through the items on the screen, by pressing the "OK" button.
This displays the following information:
- time, ) press the "MODE" button to change
- date, the permanent application (trip com-
puter, audio source...), "Audio functions" menu
- ambient temperature* (this flashes if
there is a risk of ice), ) press the " " or " " buttons to
change a setting value,
- status of the openings (doors, boot...),
) press the "OK" button to confirm,
- audio sources (radio, CD...), With the audio equipment switched on,
or once this menu has been selected you
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section). ) press the "ESC" button to abandon can activate or deactivate the functions
the operation in progress. linked with use of the radio (RDS, REG,
Warning messages (e.g.: "Emission RadioText) or the CD or CD changer
control system faulty") or information (introscan, shuffle, CD repeat).
messages (e.g.: "Automatic headlamp
lighting activated") may appear tempo-
rarily. These can be cleared by pressing For more information on the
the "ESC" button. "Audio functions" application,
refer to the Peugeot Connect
Sound part of the "Audio and
Telematics" section.
MU

* With air conditioning only.

46
 ) Press the "MENU" button to gain "Personalisation-
access to the general menu. Configuration" menu
) Press the arrows, then the "OK" but-
ton to select the "Trip computer"
menu.

Once this menu has been selected, you

"Trip computer" menu can gain access to the following func-
tions:
) On the "Trip computer" menu, select - define the vehicle parameters,
one of the following applications: - display configuration,
Once this menu has been selected, you
can consult information concerning the - choice of language.
status of the vehicle (alert log, status of
the functions...). Define the vehicle parameters
Once this menu has been selected, you
Alert log can activate or deactivate the following
equipment (according to country):
This summarises the active warning
messages, displaying them in succes- - wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
sion in the multifunction screen to the "Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the
"Access" section),
Status of functions - guide-me-home lighting (refer to the
This summarises the active or inactive sta- "Visibility" section),
tus of the functions present on the vehicle. - interior mood lighting (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- daytime running lamps (refer to the
Enter the distance to the destination "Visibility" section),
This allows you to enter an approximate - directional headlamps (refer to the
value for the distance to the final desti- "Visibility" section),
nation. - automatic or manual parking brake
(refer to the "Driving" section),
- ...

MU
47
 "Telephone" menu

With the audio equipment switched on,

once this menu has been selected you
) Press the " " or " " buttons, then can configure your Bluetooth hands-free
the "OK" button to select the "OK" kit (pairing), consult the various tele-
box and confirm or press the "ESC" phone directories (calls log, services...)
button to cancel. and manage your communications
(pick up, hang up, call waiting, secret
Example: setting of the duration of the mode...).
guide-me-home lighting.
) Press the " " or " " buttons, then Display configuration
the "OK" button to select the menu For more information on the
Once this menu has been selected, you "Telephone" application, re-
required. have access to the following settings: fer to the Peugeot Connect
- brightness-video setting, Sound part of the "Audio and
- date and time setting, Telematics" section.
- selection of the units.

) Press the " " or " " buttons, then Choice of language
the "OK" button to select the "Guide- For safety reasons, configu-
Once this menu has been selected, you ration of the multifunction
me-home headlamps" line. can change the screen display language screen by the driver must only
(Deutsch, English, Espanol, Français, be done when stationary.
Italiano, Nederlands, Portugues, Portugues-
Brasil, Türkçe*).

) Press the " " or " " buttons to set the

value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds),
then press the "OK" button to confirm.
MU

* According to country.
48
16/9 RETRACTABLE COLOUR Controls
SCREEN (WITH
( PEUGEOT For operation of the retract-
CONNECT NAVIGATION (RNEG)) able screen (opening, closing,
adjustment of the position,
etc.), refer to the paragraph "Access
to the retractable screen".

Displays in the screen From the Peugeot Connect Navigation

When the screen is unfolded, it displays (RNEG) control panel, to select one of
the following information automatically the applications:
and directly: ) press the dedicated "RADIO",
- time, "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC",
"SETUP" or "PHONE" button for
- date, access to the corresponding menu,
- altitude, ) turn the navigator to move the selection,
- ambient temperature (the value dis- ) press the navigator to confirm the
played flashes if there is a risk of selection,
ice),
or
- doors check,
) press the "ESC" button to abandon
- warning and vehicle function status the current operation and return to
messages, displayed temporarily, the previous display.
- audio functions,
- trip computer information,
- satellite navigation system information.
For more information on these
Depending on the equipment fitted to applications, refer to the "Audio
your vehicle, the trip computer informa- and Telematics" section.
tion appears in either the multifunction

MU
screen or the instrument panel screen.

49
 "SETUP" menu Display
For safety reasons, configu-
This menu allows you to set the bright- ration of the multifunction
) Press the "SETUP" button for ac- ness of the screen, the screen colour screen by the driver must only
cess to the "SETUP" menu. This al- scheme and the colour of the map (day/ be done when stationary.
lows you to select from the following night or auto mode).
functions:
- "Languages",
Vehicle parameters
- "Date and time",
This menu allows you to activate or
- "Display", deactivate certain driving and comfort
- "Vehicle parameters", equipment (according to country):
- "Units", - wiper linked with reverse gear (refer
- "System". to the "Visibility" section),
- selective unlocking (refer to the
"Access" section),
Languages - guide-me-home and welcome light-
This menu allows you to select the ing (refer to the "Visibility" section),
language used by the display: Deutsch, - interior mood lighting (refer to the
English, Espanol, Français, Italiano, "Visibility" section),
Nederlands, Polski, Portugues, Türkçe*. - daytime running lamps (refer to the
"Visibility" section),
- directional headlamps (refer to the
Date and time "Visibility" section),
This menu allows you to set the date - automatic or manual parking brake
and time, the format of the date and the (refer to the "Driving" section),
format of the time (refer to the "Audio - ...
and Telematics" section or to the specif-
ic user guide given to you with the other
owner's documents).
Units
This menu allows you to select the
units: temperature (°C or °F) and fuel
consumption (km/l, l/100 or mpg).

System
This menu allows you to restore the fac-
tory configuration, display the software
MU

version and activate scrolling text.

* According to country.
50
16/9 HIGH DEFINITION Controls
For more information on these
RETRACTABLE COLOUR SCREEN applications, refer to the "Audio
(WITH PEUGEOT CONNECT MEDIA) and Telematics" section or to the
specific user guide given to you with the
other owner's documents.

For operation of the retract-

able screen (opening, closing,
adjustment of the position, etc.),
refer to the paragraph "Access to the
retractable screen".

Displays on the screen From the Peugeot Connect Media control

panel, to select one of the applications:
When the screen is unfolded, it displays ) press the dedicated "RADIO",
the following information automatically "MEDIA", "NAV", "TRAFFIC",
and directly: "ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP" but-
- time, ton for access to the corresponding
- date, menu,
- altitude, ) turn the navigator to move the se-
lection,
- ambient temperature (the value dis-
played flashes if there is a risk of ice), ) press the navigator to confirm the
selection,
- audio functions,
or
- telephone and address book infor-
mation, ) press the "ESC" button to abandon
the current operation and return to
- satellite navigation system information. the previous display.

MU
51
 "SETUP" menu Date and time
For safety reasons, configu-
This menu allows you to set the date ration of the multifunction
and time, the format of the date and the screen by the driver must only
format of the time (refer to the "Audio be done when stationary.
and Telematics" section or to the specif-
ic user guide given to you with the other
owner's documents).

Display
This menu allows you to set the bright-
ness of the screen, the screen colour
scheme and the colour of the map (day/
night or auto mode).
) Press the "SETUP" button for
access to the "SETUP" menu. This
allows you to select from the follow-
ing functions: Units
- "Languages and voice functions", This menu allows you to select the
- "Date and time", units: temperature (°C or °F) and dis-
- "Display", tance (miles or km).
- "Units",
- "System".
System parameters
Language and voice functions This menu allows you to restore the fac-
This menu allows you to: tory configuration, display the software
- select the language used by the version and activate scrolling text.
screen (Deutsch, English, Espanol,
Français, Italiano, Nederlands, Polski,
Portugues, Türkçe*),
- select the voice recognition pa-
rameters (activation/deactivation,
advice on use, personal voice
programming, etc.),
- set the volume of the voice synthe-
siser.
MU

* According to country.
52
 Adjusting the position of the screen
If you close the screen dur-
ing operation of the audio and
telematics system, it will re-
open automatically when an outgoing
telephone call is made, when a voice
command is given or when a warning
message linked with the STOP warn-
ing lamp is received.

Closing the screen

) With the screen open, press control A
Access to the retractable screen to store it.
This screen is opened and stored auto- The screen is stored automatically
when the ignition is switched off, after When the screen is open, you can ad-
matically. just it precisely in different ways:
approximately three seconds, if the au-
However, you can also open it, store it dio and telematics system is off. ) press the corresponding part of con-
and adjust it using the various manual trol B to move the screen towards
controls: you or towards the windscreen,
- opening or storing by means of control A, Safety auto-reverse or
- angle adjustments by means of control B. If the screen meets an obstacle as it ) push or pull the screen gently by hand.
It is also fitted with safety auto-reverse opens or closes, the movement stops
protection. immediately and is reversed by a few
millimetres.
After clearing the obstacle, issue the
command required again.
Opening the screen Storing the position of the screen
) With the screen stored, press con- The system has four pre-set positions
trol A to open it. in its memory.
The screen opens automatically when If you wish the screen to open Each time the screen is closed, the
the ignition is switched on, when the au- or close automatically when system stores the last position of the
dio and telematics system is switched the audio and telematics sys- screen.
on, when an outgoing telephone call tem is switched on or off, the screen
is made, when a voice command is must not be closed when the audio Each time the screen is re-opened, the
given and when a warning message and telematics system is operating. system returns the screen to the pre-set
linked with the STOP warning lamp is position closest to that stored.

MU
received.

53
 TRIP COMPUTER

System which provides current informa-

tion concerning the trip travelled (range,
fuel consumption...).

The trip computer provides the following ) The next press then returns you to
information: the normal display.
- range,

Zero reset

Information displays - current fuel consumption,

- distance travelled,

- average fuel consumption,

) Press the control for more than two
seconds to reset to zero the distance
travelled, the average fuel consump-
tion and the average speed.
) Press the button, located at the end
of the wiper stalk, to display the - average speed.
various items of trip computer data
in succession.
MU

54
TRIP COMPUTER Information displays
System which provides current infor- With the screen C or the colour screen With the instrument panel screen
mation concerning the trip (range, con- (Peugeot Connect Navigation) (Peugeot Connect Media)
sumption…).

Monochrome screen C

16/9 colour screen - Peugeot Connect Navigation

) Press the button, located at the end ) Press the up and down arrows on
of the wiper stalk, to display the the navigator, associated with the
various trip computer tabs in suc- Peugeot Connect Media, to display
cession. the various trip computer tabs in
succession.

Instrument panel screen -

Peugeot Connect Media

Depending on your vehicle's

equipment, the trip computer
information appears on the
multifunction screen or on the instru-
ment panel screen.

MU
55
 - The current information Trip zero reset
tab with: With the screen C or the colour screen With the instrument panel screen
● the range, (Peugeot Connect Navigation) (Peugeot Connect Media)
● the current fuel
consumption,
● the distance remaining
to be travelled.

- The trip "1" tab with:

● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel
consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.

- The trip "2" tab with: ) When the trip required is displayed, ) When the required trip is displayed,
● the distance travelled, press the control for more than two press the "OK" button on the navi-
seconds. gator, associated with the Peugeot
● the average fuel Connect Media, for more than two
consumption, seconds.
● the average speed, Trips "1" and "2" are independent but
for the second trip. their use is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for
daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly
) Pressing the button again takes you figures.
to a black screen.
A further press returns you to the normal
display.

56
A few definitions…

Range Current fuel consumption Distance travelled

(miles or km) (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
This indicates the distance This is the average fuel consump- This indicates the distance
which can still be travelled tion during the last few seconds. travelled since the last trip
with the fuel remaining in the tank in computer zero reset.
relation to the average fuel consump-
tion over the last few miles (kilometres)
travelled. This function is only displayed
from 20 mph (30 km/h).

Distance remaining to
This value may vary following destination
a change in the style of driv-
ing or the relief, resulting in a (miles or km)
significant change in the current fuel This is the distance remaining
consumption. Average fuel consumption to be travelled to the final destination. It
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) is either calculated instantly by the navi-
gation system, if guidance is activated,
This is the average fuel con- or entered by the user.
sumption since the last trip
computer zero reset. If the distance is not entered, dashes
are displayed in place of the digits.
When the range falls below 20 miles
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After fill-
ing with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range
is recalculated and is displayed when it Average speed
exceeds 60 miles (100 km). Stop & Start time counter
(mph or km/h)
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
This is the average speed calcu-
lated since the last trip computer
If dashes are displayed contin- zero reset (ignition on). If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start,
uously while driving in place of a time counter calculates the time spent
the digits, contact a PEUGEOT in STOP mode during a journey.
dealer or a qualified workshop.
It resets to zero every time the ignition
is switched on with the key.

MU
57
 The air flow control enables you to in-
crease or reduce the speed of the ventila-
tion fan.
These controls are grouped together on
control panel A on the centre console.

Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/de-
frosting vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Adjustable air vents for the rear pas-
sengers.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.

HEATING AND VENTILATION Controls

System which creates and maintains The incoming air follows various routes
good conditions of comfort and visibility in depending on the controls selected by
the vehicle's passenger compartment. the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, according to the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to
The air circulating in the passenger com- obtain the level of comfort required by
partment is filtered and originates either mixing the air of the various circuits.
from the outside via the grille located at The air distribution control enables you
the base of the windscreen or from the to select the air vents used in the pas-
inside in air recirculation mode. senger compartment by the combined
CO

use of the associated buttons.

58
 Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning The air conditioning system
does not contain chlorine and
does not present any danger
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and mainte- to the ozone layer.
nance guidelines below:
) If the interior temperature remains very high after the vehicle has been
parked in the sun for a considerable time, first ventilate the passenger com-
partment for a few minutes. REAR VENTILATION
Place the air flow control at a sufficient level to provide an adequate renewal ADJUSTMENT
of air in the passenger compartment.
) To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air
intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents
and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.
) Use in preference the intake of exterior air as prolonged use of the air recir-
culation may cause misting of the windows and side windows.
) Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for
regulation of the automatic air conditioning system.
) Operate the air conditioning system for 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a
month to keep it in good working order.
) Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have
the filter elements replaced regularly (refer to the "Checks" section).
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks
to its second special active filter, it contributes to the purification of the air
breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment
(reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
) The air conditioning uses power from the engine while operating. This results
in an increase in the vehicle's fuel consumption.
When towing at or near maximum capacity or on steep slopes in high ambient
temperatures, switching off the air conditioning saves engine power and so
improves towing capacity.
After pressing the "REAR" button, turn
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water the adjustment dial of the rear side
under the vehicle when stationary, which is perfectly normal. vents to decrease or increase the flow
) To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised of air.
to have it checked regularly. Take care not to obstruct the side vents
) If the system does not produce cold air, do not use it and contact a PEUGEOT and the air outlets on the floor.
dealer or a qualified workshop.

CO
To shut off the flow of air, close the vents
and set the dial to 0.

59
 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING 1. Temperature adjustment Footwells, front-rear
(closing the vents increases
) Turn the dial from blue the flow to the footwells).
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust
the temperature to your re-
quirements.
Central, side and rear vents.
2. Air flow adjustment

) Turn the dial from posi-

tion 1 to position 5 to obtain The air distribution can be
a comfortable air flow. adapted by placing the dial in
an intermediate position.

The air conditioning can only operate

with the engine running. 4. Air intake/Air recirculation
) If you place the air flow
control in position 0 (deac- The intake of exterior air limits misting
tivation of the system), the of the windscreen and side windows.
temperature is no longer The recirculation of interior air insulates
maintained at a comfortable level. the passenger compartment from exterior
However, a slight flow of air, due to odours and smoke.
the movement of the vehicle, can still Return to exterior air intake as soon as
be felt. possible to prevent deterioration of the
air quality and demisting performance.

3. Air distribution adjustment

Windscreen and side windows. ) Press the button to recir-
culate the interior air. The
indicator lamp comes on
to confirm this.

Windscreen, side windows and ) Press the button again to permit the
front-rear footwells. intake of exterior air. The indicator
lamp goes off to confirm this.
CO

60
 5. Air conditioning On/Off REAR SCREEN
DEMIST/DEFROST
The air conditioning is de-
signed to operate effectively in The control button is located
all seasons, with the windows on the air conditioning system
closed. control panel.

It enables you to:

- lower the temperature, in summer, Switching on
Demisting/defrosting - increase the effectiveness of the The rear screen demist/defrost can only
demisting in winter, above 3 °C. operate when the engine is running.
The marking on the control ) Press this button to demist/defrost
panel indicates the position of the rear screen and the door mir-
the controls to quickly demist Switching on rors. The indicator lamp associated
or defrost the windscreen and ) Press the "A/C" button, the button's with the button comes on.
side windows: indicator lamp comes on.
) place the air intake control 4 in the The air conditioning does not operate Switching off
"Exterior air intake" position (indicator when the air flow adjustment control 2
lamp off), is in position "0". The demist/defrost switches off auto-
) place the air distribution dial 3 in the To obtain cooled air more quickly, you matically to prevent an excessive con-
"Windscreen position", can use recycling of the interior air for sumption of current.
) place the air flow dial 2 in position 5 a few moments. Then return to fresh air ) It is possible to stop the demist/de-
(maximum), intake. frost operation before it is switched off
) place the temperature dial 1 in the automatically by pressing the button
red position (hot). again. The indicator lamp associated
with the button switches off.

Switching off
) Press the "A/C" button again, the
button's indicator lamp goes off.
With Stop & Start, when dem- Switching off may affect comfort levels ) Switch off the demist/de-
isting has been activated, the (humidity, condensation). frost of the rear screen and
STOP mode is not available. door mirrors as soon as it
is no longer necessary as
lower current consumption
results in reduced fuel con-
sumption.

CO
61
 DUAL-ZONE DIGITAL AIR
When the engine is cold, to On entering the vehicle, if the
CONDITIONING prevent too great a distribu- interior temperature is much
tion of cold air, the air flow will colder or warmer than the
reach its optimum level gradually. comfort value, there is no need to
In cold weather, it favours the distri- change the value displayed in order
bution of warm air to the windscreen, to obtain the comfort required more
side windows and footwells only. quickly. The system corrects the dif-
ference in temperature automatically
and as quickly as possible.

2-3. Driver-passenger side 4. Automatic visibility programme

adjustment
The driver and front passenger The automatic comfort pro-
can each adjust the tempera- gramme may not be sufficient
The air conditioning only operates when ture to their requirements. to quickly demist or defrost the
the engine is running. windscreen and side windows
(humidity, several passengers,
Automatic operation The value indicated on the display cor- ice, etc.).
responds to a level of comfort and not ) In this case, select the automatic
1. Automatic comfort programme to a temperature in degrees Celsius or visibility programme.
Fahrenheit.
The system automatically controls the
) Press the "AUTO" button. air conditioning, the air flow and the air
The indicator lamp on the ) Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to
the right respectively to decrease or intake and provides optimum distribu-
button comes on. tion of the ventilation to the windscreen
increase this value.
and side windows.
A setting around the value 21 provides op-
We recommend the use of this mode: it per- timum comfort. However, depending on
mits automatic and optimised adjustment your requirements, a setting between 18 ) To switch it off, press the "visibility"
of all of the functions, passenger compart- and 24 is normal. button again or press the "AUTO"
ment temperature, air flow, air distribution You are advised to avoid a left/right set- button, the indicator lamp in the but-
and air recirculation, in accordance with ting difference of more than 3. ton goes off or the indicator lamp on
the comfort value that you have chosen. the "AUTO" button comes on.
This system is designed to operate ef-
fectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
CO

62
Manual operation 5. Air conditioning On/Off
7. Air flow adjustment
If you wish, you can make a different ) Press this button to switch ) Turn this control to the left
choice from that offered by the system off the air conditioning. to decrease the air flow or
by changing a setting. The other func- to the right to increase the
tions will still be controlled automati- air flow.
cally.
) Pressing the "AUTO" button returns Switching the system off could result in The air flow indicator lamps, between
the system to completely automatic discomfort (humidity, condensation). the two fans, come on progressively ac-
operation. ) Press this button again to return to cording to the value requested.
automatic operation of the air con-
ditioning. The indicator lamp in the
"A/C" button comes on.

6. Air distribution adjustment

For maximum cooling or heating With Stop & Start, when dem-
of the passenger compartment, ) Press one or more but- isting has been activated, the
it is possible to exceed the mini- tons to direct the air flow STOP mode is not available.
mum value 14 or the maximum value 28. towards:
) Turn control 2 or 3 to the left until
"LO" (low) is displayed or to the
right until "HI" (high) is displayed. - the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the vents,
- the windscreen, the side windows,
the vents and the footwells,
- the vents and the footwells,
- the vents,
- the footwells,
- the windscreen, the side windows
and the footwells.

CO
63
 8. Air recirculation 9. Rear ventilation (Rear)

) Press this button to recir- ) Press this button to allow

culate the interior air. The the air to circulate towards
indicator lamp comes on. the rear. The temperature
will be equal to the left-hand
comfort value for the rear left
- Air closed/intake (automatic mode). passengers and equal to the
Press this button, the warning lamp right-hand comfort value for
comes on. the rear right passengers.
The indicator lamp in the but-
- Forced closing of the air intake ton comes on.
(manual mode). Press this button
to recirculate the interior air, the
warning lamp come on. Switching the system off
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exte- ) Turn the air flow control to the left until
rior odours and smoke. all of the indicator lamps go off.
) As soon as possible, press the This action switches off all of the func-
"auto" button to allow the intake of tions of the system.
exterior air and avoid the misting of Temperature related comfort is no lon-
windows. ger guaranteed but a slight flow of air,
due to the movement of the vehicle, can
still be felt.
) Turn the air flow dial to the right or
press the "AUTO" button to reacti-
vate the system with the values set
before it was switched off.

Avoid driving for prolonged

periods with the system off.
CO

64
FRONT SEATS
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat
back and a head restraint which can all
be adjusted to adapt your position for
ease of driving and comfort.

Manual adjustments

Forwards-backwards adjustment Driver's or passenger's seat height Seat back angle adjustment
) Raise the control and slide the seat adjustment ) Push the control rearwards.
forwards or backwards. ) Pull the control upwards to raise
or push it downwards to lower, as
many times as necessary, to obtain
the position required.

CO
65
 DRIVER'S ELECTRIC SEAT
The electrical functions of the
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat driver's seat are active approxi-
back and a head restraint which can all mately one minute after opening
be adjusted to adapt your position for the front door. They are deactivated ap-
ease of driving and comfort. proximately one minute after the ignition
is switched off and in economy mode.
To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.

Forwards-backwards adjustment Seat cushion height and angle

) Push the control forwards or rear- adjustment
Seat back angle adjustment
wards to slide the seat. ) Tilt the rear part of the control up-
wards or downwards to obtain the ) Tilt the control forwards or rearwards
required height. to adjust the angle of the seat back.
) Tilt the front part of the control up-
wards or downwards to obtain the
required angle.
CO

66
Additional adjustments Heated seats control
The head restraint is fitted with
a frame with notches which With the engine running, the front seats
Head restraint height and angle can be heated separately.
adjustment prevents it from lowering; this
is a safety device in case of impact.
) To raise the head restraint, pull it for- The adjustment is correct when the ) Use the adjustment dial, placed on
wards and upwards at the same time. upper edge of the head restraint is the side of each front seat, to switch
) To remove the head restraint, press the level with the top of the head. on and select the level of heating re-
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. Never drive with the head restraints quired:
) To put the head restraint back in removed; they must be in place and
place, engage the head restraint adjusted correctly. 0: Off.
stems in the openings keeping them 1: Low.
in line with the seat back. 2: Medium.
) To lower the head restraint, press 3: High.
the lug A and the head restraint at
the same time.
) To adjust the angle of the head re-
straint, tilt its lower part forwards or Manual lumbar adjustment
rearwards. ) Turn the knob to obtain the desired
level of lumbar support.

CO
67
 Table position, front passenger
seat

Folding the seat backrest Returning the seat to the normal

) Raise the armrest and fold up the This position, associated with that of the position
"aircraft" style table, fixed on the rear seats, allows you to transport long ) Guide the seat backrest rearwards
back of the seat. objects inside the vehicle. until it locks in place.
) Check that no object, either on or The maximum weight on the seat is
underneath the seat, could hinder 30 kg.
its movement.
) To make the operation easier, place
the head restraint in the low position
(if the seat is in the fully forward po-
sition).
) If your vehicle is fitted with the video
pack, place the protective cover on
the head restraint.
) Lift the control, located behind the
seat, then guide the seat back for-
wards.

When the seat backrest is in this po-

sition, only the 2nd row passenger
CO

seat located behind the driver can be

used.

68
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS 2ND ROW SEATS
Forwards-backwards adjustment Placing a seat in the "comfort"
position

The rear head restraints can be removed

and have two positions: Lift the control A, located at the front of ) Pull on the control B and guide the
- high, position for use, the seat, then adjust the seat to the po- seat rearwards.
- low, storage position. sition desired. The backrest reclines and the seat base
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards. moves forward slightly.
To lower it, press the lug then the head "Comfort" position
restraint. Returning the seat to the initial
To remove it, place it in the high posi- position
tion, push the lug and pull it upwards. ) Pull on the control B and allow the
To refit it, engage the head restraint seat to come forwards.
rods in the holes taking care to remain
in line with the seat back.

Always supervise any move-

ments of seats by children.

Never drive with the head re-

straints removed, they must be The three 2nd row seats are indepen-

CO
in place and correctly adjusted. dent of each other and all the same
width. They all have a "comfort" position.

69
 Flat floor
Each seat can be folded onto the floor
to enable you to modify your vehicle’s
interior space.
Folding the seat from the 2nd row Folding the seat from the boot Repositioning seat

) Place the seats as far towards the When loading, for example, you can ) If necessary, return the 2nd row seat
rear as possible. fold the seat or seats directly from the rigid panels to their initial position
) Pull firmly upwards on strap C, to boot, once you have folded the 3rd row and lock them.
unlock the seat; keep pulling until seats (7 seat version). ) Raise the backrest and push it rear-
the seat is fully folded. ) Place the seats as far towards the wards until it locks.
) Push the backrest slightly forwards rear as possible.
so that the backrest pivots, folding ) Pull on the strap D to release the Before moving the 3rd row
onto the seat base. The assembly chosen seat and push the backrest seats (7 seat version), return
then lowers onto the floor. gently forwards. the 2nd row seat rigid panels
to their initial position and lock them.
Emergency exit: if the first system
(strap C) fails, strap D enables the
3rd row passengers to exit quickly.
To avoid damaging the mecha-
nism, the strap D unclips under
excessive force. Simply reclip it Supervise any movement of seats by
CO

to restore the system to working order. children.

70
Rigid panel Entering/Exiting the 3rd row Repositioning the seat, from the
(7 seat version) outside, with the door open
If there are passengers seated in the
3rd row (7 seat version):
) Manually return the assembly as far
as possible rearwards; the seat does
not return as far as the maximum
rearwards position so as to retain leg
space for the 3rd row passengers.
) Fold the seat base.

Each 2nd row seat backrest has a rigid ) Raise the aircraft style table on the
panel attached. 2nd row seat if it is down.
This panel enables you: ) Hold the control F in the raised posi-
- to have a continuous load surface in tion, the seat unlocks and the seat
the boot, whatever the positions of base comes up against the backrest.
the seats, ) Push the seat backrest forwards,
- to avoid having objects sliding under holding the control F forwards.
the 2nd row seats. 30 kg maximum
on each panel.

Releasing/Locking the rigid panel

) Before deploying the rigid panels,
check that the 2nd row seats are po-
sitioned as far towards the rear as
possible.
) Slide the latch E on the panel up-
wards, to release it.
) Return the panel to its initial position,
then slide the latch E downwards, to
lock it in place.

CO
71
 3RD ROW SEATS
(7 SEAT VERSION)
Concertina boards Storing a seat

Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot ) Remove the load space screen. ) Lower the head restraints.
be separated from the vehicle, cover the ) If necessary, return the 2nd row rig- ) Correctly position the concertina
two 3rd row seats, when these are in the id panels to their initial position and board vertically behind the seat.
folded position. lock them. ) Pull on the control H, located at the
) Correctly position the concertina bottom of the seat backrest. The
board vertically behind the seat. seat is released.
Folding the concertina boards
) Pull on the control G, located behind ) Next push the backrest gently for-
) Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the seat backrest. The backrest tilts wards. The backrest pivots folding
the board will fold like a concertina. rearwards pulling the seat base with onto the seat base. The seat base
When the 3rd row seats are upright, these it. The seat locks in the open posi- then folds into the stowage area
concertina boards can be left either: tion. provided for that purpose.
- flat behind the seats, ) Reposition the concertina boards
- in the vertical position, over the folded seats.
thereby leaving a storage area available.
The two rigid boards can each support
a maximum of 100 kg.
CO

72
 Examples of configurations
Before moving the 3rd row
seats, return the rigid panels
of the 2nd row seats to the up- 7 seats Transport (4 seats)
right position and lock them in place.
Do not try to fold a 3rd row seat that
has not first had the backrest fully
locked in place.
Do not leave objects either on or
underneath the seat bases of the
3rd row seats when you are folding
them.
Do not leave your hand on the con-
trol H as you fold the seats, as you
risk trapping your fingers.
5 seats Transporting long objects

SEAT MODULARITY AND

THE VARIOUS SEAT
CONFIGURATIONS
Designed to be modular, your vehicle
offers numerous seat installation and
loading configurations. Loading a large volume
Operations to change the existing
configuration must only be carried out
when stationary (see paragraphs "Rear
seats".

CO
73
 MIRRORS Adjustment Folding
- Automatic: lock the vehicle using
the remote control or the key.
- Manual: with the ignition on, pull
control A rearwards.

If the mirrors are folded using

control A, they will not unfold
when the vehicle is unlocked.
Pull again on control A.

Door mirrors ) Move control A to the right or to the left Unfolding

to select the corresponding mirror. - Automatic: unlock the vehicle using
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror ) Move control B in all four directions the remote control or the key.
glass permitting the lateral rearward vi- to adjust.
sion necessary for overtaking or parking. - Manual: with the ignition on, pull
They can also be folded for parking in ) Return control A to the central position. control A rearwards.
confined spaces.

Demisting - Defrosting
The objects observed are, in The folding and unfolding of
If your vehicle is fitted with heated mir- reality, closer than they ap- the door mirrors using the
rors, the demisting-defrosting operates pear. remote control can be deac-
with the engine running, by switching tivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
on the heated rear screen (refer to the Take this into account in order to cor-
rectly judge the distance of vehicles qualified workshop.
"Rear screen demist-defrost" page).
approaching from behind. Fold the mirrors when putting your
vehicle through an automatic car
wash.
CO

74
Rear view mirror Automatic day/night model
Adjustable mirror providing a central
rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system,
which darkens the mirror glass: this re-
duces the nuisance to the driver caused
by the headlamps from following vehi-
cles, low sun...

Manual day/night model

By means of a sensor, which measures

the light from the rear of the vehicle, this ) When stationary, pull the con-
system automatically and progressively trol lever to release the adjustment
changes between the day and night mechanism.
uses. ) Adjust the height and reach to suit
your driving position.
) Push the control lever to lock the ad-
justment mechanism.

Adjustment
) Adjust the mirror so that the glass is di-
rected correctly in the "day" position.

Day/night position
In order to ensure optimum vis- As a safety precaution, these
) Pull the lever to change to the "night" ibility during your manoeuvres, operations should only be car-
anti-dazzle position. the mirror lightens automatically ried out while the vehicle is
) Push the lever to change to the normal when reverse gear is engaged. stationary.
"day" position.

As a safety measure, the mirrors

should be adjusted to reduce the

CO
"blind spot".

75
 REMOTE CONTROL KEY Complete unlocking using the key Each unlocking is confirmed by rapid
) Turn the key to the left in the driver's flashing of the direction indicators for
System which permits central unlock- door lock to unlock the vehicle. approximately two seconds.
ing or locking of the vehicle using the Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing According to version, the door mirrors
lock or from a distance. It is also used to of the direction indicators for approxi- unfold at the same time as the first
locate and start the vehicle, as well as mately two seconds. unlocking action.
providing protection against theft. The selective unlocking is only available
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold at the same time. on versions fitted with deadlocking.

The complete or selective

unlocking parameter is set
via the multifunction screen
Selective unlocking using the configuration menu.
remote control
) Press the open padlock
once to unlock the driver's Complete unlocking is activated by
door only. default.

) Press the open padlock again to

unlock the other doors and the boot.

Unlocking the vehicle

Selective unlocking using the key
Unfolding the key ) Turn the key to the left in the driver's
) First press this button to unfold the door lock once to unlock the driver's
key. door only.
) Turn the key to the left in the driver's
Complete unlocking using the door lock again to unlock the other
remote control doors and the boot.
) Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.

76
Locking the vehicle Deadlocking using the remote Folding the key
control
Normal locking using the remote
control ) Press the closed padlock
to lock the vehicle com-
) Press the closed padlock pletely or press the closed
to lock the vehicle com- padlock for more than two
pletely. seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in ad-
dition to locking (according
) Press the closed padlock for more to version).
than two seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in addition to ) Press the closed padlock again
locking (according to version). within five seconds to deadlock the
vehicle.
Normal locking using the key
) Turn the key to the right in the driver's Deadlocking using the key
door lock to lock the vehicle completely. ) First press this button to
) Turn the key to the right in the driver's fold the key.
Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of door lock to lock the vehicle com-
the direction indicators for approximately pletely and hold it in this position for
two seconds. more than two seconds to close the
According to version, the door mirrors windows automatically in addition to
fold at the same time. locking (according to version). If you do not press the button
) Turn the key to the right again within when folding the key, there is
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle. a risk of damage to the mech-
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting anism.
If one of the doors or the boot of the direction indicators for approximately
is still open, the central locking two seconds.
does not take place. According to version, the door mirrors
When the vehicle is locked, if it is fold at the same time. Locating your vehicle
unlocked inadvertently, it will relock
automatically after thirty seconds un- ) Press the closed padlock to locate
less a door is opened. your locked vehicle in a car park.
Deadlocking renders the exte- This is indicated by lighting of the direction
rior and interior door controls indicators for a few seconds.
inoperative.
The folding and unfolding of It also deactivates the manual central
the door mirrors using the control button.
remote control can be deac- Therefore, never leave anyone inside

AC
tivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
qualified workshop.

77
 Anti-theft protection Starting the vehicle Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (posi-
Electronic engine immobiliser ) Insert the key in the ignition switch. tion 1-Stop), you can still use functions
The key contains an electronic chip The system recognises the starting such as the audio and telematics sys-
which has a special code. When the code. tem, the wipers, the dipped headlamps,
ignition is switched on, this code must ) Turn the key fully towards the dash- the courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum
be recognised in order for starting to be board to position 3 (Starting). combined period of thirty minutes.
possible.
) When the engine starts, release the
This electronic engine immobiliser locks key.
the engine management system a few
minutes after the ignition is switched off
and prevents starting of the engine by
anyone who does not have the key.
For more information, refer
to the "Practical information -
In the event of a fault, you are Energy economy mode" section.
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal
and a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as
possible.
Keep safely the label attached to the
keys given to you on acquisition of the A heavy object (key fob...),
vehicle. attached to the key and weigh-
ing down on its shaft in the
Switching the vehicle off ignition switch, could cause a
malfunction.
) Immobilise the vehicle.
) Turn the key fully towards you to po-
sition 1 (Stop).
) Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
ACC

78
Remote control problem Changing the battery

Following disconnection of the vehicle

battery, replacement of the remote con-
trol battery or in the event of a remote
control malfunction, you can no longer
unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
) First of all, use the key in the lock to
unlock or lock your vehicle.
) Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer as soon as possible.

Reinitialisation Battery ref.: CR1620/3 volts.

) Switch off the ignition.
) Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). If the battery is flat, you are in-
) Press the closed padlock immedi- formed by illumination of this
ately for a few seconds. warning lamp, an audible signal
and a message in the multifunc-
) Switch off the ignition and remove tion screen.
the key from the ignition switch.
) Unclip the casing using a coin at the
The remote control is fully operational notch.
again.
) Slide the flat battery out of its location.
) Slide the new battery into its loca-
tion observing the original direction.
) Clip the casing.
) Reinitialise the remote control.

AC
79
 Lost keys Do not throw the remote con-
trol batteries away, they contain
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your metals which are harmful to the
personal identification documents and if possible the key code label. environment.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to find the key code and the transponder Take them to an approved collection
code required to order a new key. point.

Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the
ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment
by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition
switch when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.

Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this
could cause malfunctions.

When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
ACC

80
ALARM Locking the vehicle with full Locking the vehicle with
alarm exterior protection alarm only
System which protects and provides a
deterrent against the theft of your vehi-
cle. It provides two types of protection, Deactivation of the interior
exterior and interior, as well as an anti- volumetric protection
tamper function. ) Switch off the ignition.
) Within ten seconds, press button A
Exterior perimiter protection until the indicator lamp is on contin-
uously.
The system detects opening of the ve- ) Get out of the vehicle.
hicle.
) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to the locking button on the remote
enter the vehicle by forcing a door, the control.
boot or the bonnet.
The exterior protection alarm alone re-
mains activated; the indicator lamp in
Interior volumetric protection button A flashes once per second.
Activation
The system detects any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment. ) Switch off the ignition and get out of
the vehicle. To be effective, this deactivation
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks must be carried out each time
a window or moves inside the vehicle. ) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
the locking button on the remote the ignition is switched off.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle control.
or a window partially open, deactivate
the interior volumetric protection. The alarm is activated; the indicator lamp
in button A flashes once per second.

Anti-tamper function Deactivation Reactivation of the interior

) Unlock the vehicle using the unlock- volumetric protection
The system detects the putting out of ing button on the remote control. ) Unlock the vehicle using the unlock-
service of its components. ing button on the remote control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indicator
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries lamp in button A switches off. ) Relock the vehicle using the remote
to put the wires of the siren, the central control.
control or the battery out of service.
The alarm is activated again with both
types of protection; the indicator lamp in
button A switches off.
Do not make any modifica-
tions to the alarm system, this

AC
could cause malfunctions.

81
 Triggering Failure of the remote control Automatic operation*
This is indicated by sounding of the si- ) Unlock the vehicle using the key in Depending on the legislation in force in
ren and flashing of the direction indica- the driver's door lock. your country, one of these cases may
tors for approximately thirty seconds. ) Open the door; the alarm is trig- occur:
After it has been triggered, the alarm is gered. - 45 seconds after the vehicle is
again operational. ) Switch on the ignition; the alarm locked using the remote control, the
stops. alarm is activated, regardless of the
status of the doors and boot.
- 2 minutes after the last door or the
Locking the vehicle without boot is closed, the alarm is activated.
If the alarm is triggered ten
times in succession, the elev- activating the alarm ) To avoid triggering the alarm on
enth time will result in it be- ) Lock or deadlock the vehicle using entering the vehicle, first press the
coming inactive. the key in the driver's door lock. unlocking button on the remote
control.
If the indicator lamp in button A
flashes rapidly, this indicates that the
alarm was triggered during your ab-
sence. When the ignition is switched Malfunction
on, this flashing stops immediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when When the ignition is switched on, illumi-
washing your vehicle, lock it using nation the indicator lamp in button A for
the key in the driver's door lock. ten seconds indicates a siren fault.
Do not activate the alarm before dis- Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
connecting the battery, otherwise the or a qualified workshop.
siren will sound.
ACC

* According to country.
82
ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows After approximately ten con-
System intended to open or close a There are two options: secutive complete opening/
window manually or automatically. Fit- closing movements of the win-
- manual mode dow, a protection function is activat-
ted with a safety anti-pinch system and
a system for deactivation in the event of ) Press or pull the control gently. ed to prevent damage to the electric
misuse of the rear controls. The window stops when the window motor.
control is released. After this, you have approximately
one minute within which to close the
window.
Once the window is closed, the con-
trols will become available again af-
- automatic mode ter approximately 40 minutes.
) Press or pull the control firmly.
The window opens or closes fully
when the control is released.
) Pressing the control again stops
the movement of the window. Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an
obstacle, it stops and partially lowers
again.

1. Driver's electric window control. If the window cannot be closed

(for example, in the presence
2. Passenger's electric window of ice), immediately after the
control. movement is reversed:
3. Rear right electric window The electric window controls
remain operational for ap- ) press and hold the control until
control. the window opens fully,
proximately 45 seconds after
4. Rear left electric window control. the ignition is switched off or until the ) then pull the control immediately
5. Deactivation of the rear electric vehicle is locked after a front door is and hold it until the window closes,
window and door controls. opened. ) continue to hold the control for
If one of the passenger windows can- approximately one second after
not be operated from the driver's door the window has closed.
control pad, carry out the operation The safety anti-pinch function is
from the control pad of the passen- not operational during these op-
ger door concerned, and vice versa. erations.

AC
83
 Reinitialisation Deactivation of the rear electric
Any other status of the indica-
If a window does not rise automatically, window and door controls tor lamp indicates a malfunc-
its operation must be reinitialised: tion of the electric child lock.
) pull the control until the window Have it checked by a PEUGEOT
stops, dealer or a qualified workshop.
) release the control and pull it again, Always remove the key from the igni-
repeat these operations until the tion when leaving the vehicle, even
window closes fully, for a short time.
) continue to hold the control for ap- If an obstacle is encountered during
proximately one second after the operation of the electric windows,
window has closed, you must reverse the movement of
) press the control to lower the window the window. To do this, press the
automatically to the low position, control concerned.
) when the window has reached the When the driver operates the con-
low position, press the control again ) For the safety of your children, with trols for the passengers' electric win-
for approximately one second. the ignition on, press control 5 to dows, they must ensure that no one
deactivate the rear electric window is preventing correct closing of the
controls regardless of their position. windows.
It is still possible to open the doors from The driver must ensure that the pas-
the outside and operate the rear electric sengers use the electric windows
The safety anti-pinch function is not windows from the driver's control pad. correctly.
operational during these operations. Be aware of children when operating
the windows.

Indicator lamp on, the rear

controls are deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear
controls are activated.

This control also deactivates

the interior controls for the
rear doors (refer to the section
"Child safety - § Electric child lock").

84
DOORS From inside Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
Opening
- when the engine is running,
From outside this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
in the multifunction screen for
a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this
warning lamp comes on, accom-
panied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen
for a few seconds.

) Pull the door control (front or rear)

to open the door; this unlocks this
vehicle completely.

) After unlocking the vehicle com-

pletely using the remote control or
the key, pull the door handle.

The interior door controls do

not operate when the vehicle
is deadlocked.

AC
85
 Centralised locking control When locking/deadlocking from the
outside A confirmation message ap-
System which provides full manual pears in the multifunction
When the vehicle is locked or dead- screen, accompanied by an
locking or unlocking of the doors from locked from the outside, the red indicator
the inside. audible signal.
lamp flashes and the button is inactive.
) After normal locking, pull the interior
door lever to unlock the vehicle.
) After deadlocking, it is necessary to Deactivation
use the remote control or the key to ) Press this button again for more
unlock the vehicle. than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears in the
multifunction screen, accompanied by
an audible signal.

Automatic central locking

Locking
System which provides full automatic
locking or unlocking of the doors and When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
boot while driving, if they are closed the doors and boot lock automatically.
correctly. If one of the doors is open, the automatic
Locking central locking does not take place.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
) Press this button to lock the vehicle. If the boot is open, the automatic cen-
The red indicator lamp in the button tral locking of the doors is active.
comes on.
Activation

If one of the doors is open, the

central locking from the inside Unlocking
does not take place.
) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press this
button to unlock the doors and boot
temporarily.
Unlocking
) Press this button again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button
ACC

goes off. In the event of an impact, the

doors unlock automatically.
) Press this button for more than two
seconds.

86
Emergency control BOOT
System which locks or unlocks the
doors mechanically in the event of a
malfunction of the battery or of the cen-
tral locking.
In the event of a fault with the central
locking, you must disconnect the bat-
tery to lock the boot and so ensure the
complete locking of the vehicle.

Locking the driver's door

) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it
to the right.
Unlocking the driver's door
) Insert the key in the lock, then turn it Opening Closing
to the left.
) After unlocking the vehicle using the ) Lower the tailgate using the interior
remote control or the key, pull the grab handle.
Locking the front and rear handle and raise the tailgate. If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
passenger doors
- when the engine is running,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by a message
in the multifunction screen for
a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warn-
ing lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message
in the multifunction screen for a few
seconds.
) Insert the key in the lock, located on
the edge of the door, then turn it one
eighth of a turn. When selective unlocking is
activated, the boot can also
Unlocking the front and rear be opened by a second press

AC
passenger doors on the open padlock on the re-
) Pull the interior door opening control. mote control.

87
 Tailgate release
System allowing the mechanical unlocking
of the boot in the event of a battery or central
locking system malfunction.

Unlocking
) Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside the
boot.
) Insert a small screwdriver into hole A
of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
) Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again,
the boot will remain locked.
ACC

88
FUEL TANK To fill the tank safely:
) the engine must be switched off,
Capacity of the tank: approximately ) open the fuel filler flap,
60 litres. ) insert the key in the cap, then turn it
Low fuel level to the left,

When the low fuel level is

reached, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message
in the multifunction screen. When the
lamp first comes on, there is approxi- ) remove the cap and secure it on the
mately 6 litres of fuel remaining. hook, located on the inside of the
Until sufficient fuel has been added, this flap,
warning lamp appears every time the ) fill the tank, but do not continue af-
ignition is switched on, accompanied by ter the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle;
an audible signal and a message. When this could cause malfunctions.
driving, this audible signal and message
are repeated with increasing frequency,
as the fuel level drops towards "0".

You must refuel to avoid run-

ning out of fuel. When refuelling is complete: The key cannot be removed
) put the cap back in place, from the lock until the cap is
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer put back on the tank.
also to the "Checks" section. ) turn the key to the right, then remove
it from the cap, Opening the cap may trigger an in-
) close the filler flap. rush of air. This vacuum, which is
completely normal, is caused by the
sealing of the fuel system.
Refuelling
Operating fault
A label affixed to the inside of the filler
flap reminds you of the type of fuel to be A malfunction of the fuel gauge is indi-
used according to your engine. cated by the return to zero of the fuel With Stop & Start, never re-
gauge needle. fuel with the system in STOP
More than 5 litres of fuel must be added

AC
in order to be registered by the fuel gauge. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer mode; you must switch off the
or a qualified workshop. ignition with the key.

89
 Quality of the fuel used for Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines Diesel engines
Mechanical device which prevents fill-
ing the tank of a Diesel vehicle with
petrol. It avoids the risk of engine dam-
age that can result from filling with the
DIESEL wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel
prevention device appears when the
filler cap is removed.
The petrol engines are perfectly compat- The Diesel engines are perfectly com-
ible with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels patible with biofuels which conform to
(containing 10 % or 24 % ethanol), con- current and future European standards
forming to European standards EN 228 (Diesel fuel which complies with stand-
and EN 15376. ard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % complies with standard EN 14214)
ethanol) are reserved exclusively for ve- available at the pumps (containing up
hicles marketed for the use of this type to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
the ethanol must comply with European tain Diesel engines; however, this use
standard EN 15293. is subject to strict application of the
For Brazil only, special vehicles are special servicing conditions. Contact a
marketed to run on fuels containing up PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work-
to 100 % ethanol (E100 type). shop. Operation
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or dilut- When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into
ed, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel comes into contact with the flap. The sys-
system). tem remains closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel
type filler nozzle.
Travelling abroad
It is still possible to use a fuel
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be dif- can to fill the reservoir.
ferent in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may
make refuelling impossible. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel
Before travelling abroad, we recommend can in direct contact with the flap of
ACC

that you check with the PEUGEOT deal- the misfuel prevention device.
er network, whether your vehicle is suit-
able for the fuel pumps in the country in
which you want to travel.
* According to destination country.
90
LIGHTING CONTROLS Manual controls
System for selection and control of the The lighting is controlled directly by the
various front and rear lamps providing Model without AUTO lighting driver by means of the ring A and the
the vehicle's lighting. stalk B.
A. Main lighting mode selection ring:
Main lighting turn it to position the symbol required
The various front and rear lamps of facing the mark.
the vehicle are designed to adapt the
lighting progressively in relation to the
climatic conditions and so improve the Lamps off.
driver's visibility:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see
without dazzling other drivers, Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
- main beam headlamps to see clearly
when the road is clear,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering. Sidelamps.

Additional lighting Model with AUTO lighting Dipped headlamps or

main beam headlamps.
Other lamps are installed to fulfil the
requirements of particular driving con-
ditions: B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a the stalk towards you to switch the
distance, lighting between dipped and main
beam headlamps.
- front foglamps for even better visibility,
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes,
- daytime running lamps to be seen the driver can switch on the main beam
during the day. headlamps temporarily ("headlamp
flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control
modes are also available according to Displays
the following options: Illumination of the corresponding indicator

VIS
- guide-me-home lighting, lamp in the instrument panel confirms that
- automatic lighting, the lighting selected is on.
- directional headlamps.
91
 C. Fog lamps selection ring. When the lighting is switched on auto-
matically (with AUTO model), the dipped
headlamps and sidelamps remain on
until the rear foglamp is switched off.
Model with rear foglamp only rear foglamp When the lighting is switched off auto-
matically (with AUTO model) or when
the dipped headlamps are switched off
This operates with the dipped beam manually, the foglamps and the side-
headlamps and main beam headlamps. lamps will remain on.
) To switch on the foglamp, turn the
ring C forwards.
) To switch off the foglamp, turn the
ring C rearwards.
When the lighting is switched on auto-
matically (with AUTO model), the dipped In good or rainy weather, by
headlamps and sidelamps remain on both day and night, the front
until the rear foglamp is switched off. foglamps and the rear foglamp
are prohibited. In these situations,
the power of their beams may dazzle
other drivers.
Do not forget to switch off the front
Model with front and rear foglamps foglamps and the rear foglamp when
they are no longer necessary.
front and rear foglamps

The rear foglamp operates with the

dipped beam and main beam head-
lamps.
The front foglamps also operate with
the sidelamps. Lighting on audible warning
) To switch on the rear foglamp, turn When the ignition is switched off, all of
the ring C forwards. the lamps switch off automatically, unless
guide-me-home lighting is activated.
) To switch on the front foglamps, turn
the ring C forwards again. If the lighting is switched on manually
after switching off the ignition, there
) To switch off the rear foglamp, turn is an audible signal when a front door
the ring C rearwards. is opened to warn the driver that they
) To switch off the front foglamps, turn have forgotten to switch off the vehicle's
VIS

the ring C rearwards again. lighting, with the ignition off.

92
 Manual guide-me-home lighting EXTERIOR WELCOME
In some weather conditions LIGHTING
(e.g. low temperature or hu- Temporarily keeping the dipped beam
midity), the presence of mist- headlamps on after the vehicle's igni- The remote switching on of the light-
ing on the internal surface tion has been switched off makes the ing makes your approach to the vehicle
of the glass of the headlamps and driver's exit easier when the light is easier in poor light. It is activated ac-
rear lamps is normal; it disappears poor. cording to the level of light detected by
after the lamps have been on for a the sunshine sensor.
few minutes.
Switching on
) Press the open padlock on
the remote control.
System which permits switching on of the
special lamps at the front (low power), so
that you can be seen during the daytime.
The daytime running lamps come on The dipped beam headlamps and the
automatically when the vehicle is start- sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also
ed, if fitted*. unlocked.
The instruments and controls (multi-
function screen, air conditioning control Switching off
panel, ...) are not lit, except when the The exterior welcome lighting switches
lighting is switched on manually or au- off automatically after a set time, when
tomatically. the ignition is switched on or on locking
Programming Switching on the vehicle.
) With the ignition off, "flash" the
In countries in which this headlamps using the lighting stalk.
function is not imposed by ) A further "headlamp flash" switches Programming
regulations, you can acti- the function off.
vate or deactivate it via the The lighting duration is se-
multifunction screen con- lected via the vehicle con-
figuration menu. figuration menu.
Switching off
In countries in which it is imposed by The manual guide-me-home lighting
regulations: switches off automatically after a set
time.
- by default, this function is activated,
- the sidelamps and the number plate The duration of the welcome
lamps are also switched on*. lighting is associated with and

VIS
identical to that of the automat-
ic guide-me-home lighting.

* According to country.
93
 Automatic illumination of headlamps Associated with the automatic MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
"Guide-me-home" lighting HALOGEN HEADLAMPS
The sidelamps and dipped beam head- Association with the automatic lighting
lamps are switched on automatically, provides the "guide-me-home" lighting
without any action on the part of the with the following additional options:
driver, when a low level of external light
is detected or in certain cases of activa- - selection of the lighting duration of
tion of the windscreen wipers. 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle
parameters in the vehicle configura-
As soon as the brightness returns to a tion menu,
sufficient level or after the windscreen
wipers are switched off, the lamps are - automatic activation of "guide-me-
switched off automatically. home" lighting when automatic lillumi-
nation of headlamps is in operation.

Operating fault To avoid causing a nuisance to other

In the event of a malfunction of road users, the height of the halogen
the sunshine sensor, the lighting headlamps should be adjusted accord-
comes on, this warning lamp is ing to the load in the vehicle.
displayed in the instrument panel 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
and/or a message appears in the screen, -. 3 people.
accompanied by an audible signal. 1. 5 people.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali- -. Intermediate setting.
fied workshop.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
Activation -. Intermediate setting.
) Turn the ring to the "AUTO" posi- In fog or snow, the sunshine 3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
tion. The automatic illumination of sensor may detect sufficient
headlamps is accompanied by a light. In this case, the lighting
message in the screen. will not come on automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
Deactivation coupled with the rain sensor and lo-
cated in the centre of the windscreen
) Turn the ring to another position. behind the rear view mirror; the as- The initial setting is position "0".
Deactivation is accompanied by a sociated functions would no longer
message in the screen. be controlled.
VIS

94
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING Programming
THE XENON HEADLAMPS
When the dipped or main beam head- The function is activated or
lamps are on, this function enables the deactivated via the vehicle
light beams to provide improved lighting configuration menu.
of the side of the road when cornering.
The use of this function, from approxi-
mately 12 mph (20 km/h) and associ-
ated with the xenon headlamps only,
considerably improves the quality of
your lighting when cornering.

with directional lighting Operating fault

If a fault occurs, this warning
lamp flashes in the instrument
panel, accompanied by a mes-
sage in the screen.
In order to avoid causing a nuisance to Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
other road users, this system corrects fied workshop.
the height of the xenon headlamps beam
automatically and when stationary, in re-
lation to the load in the vehicle.

If a malfunction occurs, this warn-

ing lamp is displayed on the in- without directional lighting
strument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message
on the multifunction screen.
The system then places your headlamps
in the lowest position.
When stationary or moving
at very low speed or when
reverse gear is engaged, the
If a malfunction occurs, do not function is inactive.
touch the xenon bulbs. Con-
tact a PEUGEOT dealer or a The status of the function remains
in the memory when the ignition is

VIS
qualified workshop.
switched off.

95
 WIPER CONTROLS Model with intermittent wiping Manual controls
System for selection and control of the The wiper commands are issued direct-
various front and rear wiping modes for ly by the driver by means of the stalk A
the elimination of rain and cleaning. and the ring B.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibil-
ity progressively according to the cli- Windscreen wipers
matic conditions. A. Wiping speed selection stalk:

fast (heavy rain),

normal (moderate rain),

Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes intermittent (proportional to
are also available according to the fol- the speed of the vehicle),
lowing options:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen park,
wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse Model with AUTO wiping single wipe (press down and
gear. release),

or

automatic, then single

wipe (see following page).
VIS

96
Rear wiper B. Rear wiper selection ring: Windscreen and headlamp
wash

park,

intermittent wipe,

wash-wipe (set duration).

) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk to-

Reverse gear wards you. The windscreen wash
When reverse gear is engaged, the then the windscreen wipers operate
rear wiper will come into operation if the for a fixed period.
windscreen wipers are operating. The headlamp washers only operate
when the dipped beam headlamps
are on.
Programming
The function is activated or Screenwash/headlamp wash low
deactivated via the multi- level
function screen configura-
tion menu. In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, when the
This function is activated minimum level of the reservoir
by default. is reached, this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel, ac-
companied by an audible signal and a
If a significant accumulation message in the multifunction screen.
of snow or ice is present, or The warning lamp is displayed when
when using a bicycle carrier the ignition is switched on, or every time
on the boot, deactivate the auto- the stalk is operated, until the reservoir
matic rear wiper via the multifunction is refilled.

VIS
screen configuration menu.
Next time you stop, refill the screen-
wash/headlamp wash reservoir.

97
 Automatic rain sensitive Special position of the
The automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers wipers must be reactivated if windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automati- the ignition has been off for
cally, without any action on the part of the more than one minute, by pushing
driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the stalk downwards.
the rear view mirror), adapting their speed
to the intensity of the rainfall.

Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction oc-
curs, the wipers will operate in intermit-
tent mode. This position permits release of the
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer windscreen wiper blades.
or a qualified workshop. It is used for cleaning or replacement
Activation of the blades. It can also be useful, in
This is controlled manually by the driver winter, to detach the blades from the
by pushing the stalk downwards to the windscreen.
"AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message in the ) Any action on the wiper stalk imme-
screen. diately after switching off the ignition
places the blades vertically on the
screen.
) To park the blades again, switch on
the ignition and operate the wiper
stalk.

Do not cover the rain sensor, To maintain the effectiveness

linked with the sunshine sen- of the "flat-blade" type of wiper
sor and located in the centre blades, it is advisable to:
of the windscreen behind the rear - handle them with care,
Switching off view mirror.
- clean them regularly using soapy
This is controlled manually by the driver Switch off the automatic rain sensi- water,
by moving the stalk upwards then re- tive wipers when using an automatic
car wash. - avoid using them to retain card-
turning it to position "0". board on the windscreen,
It is accompanied by a message in the In winter, to avoid damaging the wip-
er blades, it is advisable to wait until - replace them at the first signs of
VIS

screen. wear.
the windscreen is completely clear of
ice before activating the automatic
rain sensitive wipers.

98
COURTESY LAMPS Front and rear courtesy lamps
When the front courtesy lamp
is in the "permanent lighting"
In this position, the courtesy position, the rear courtesy
lamp comes on gradually: lamp will also come on, unless it is in
the "permanently off" position.
- when the vehicle is unlocked, To switch off the rear courtesy lamp,
- when the key is removed from the place it in the "permanently off" position.
ignition,
- when a door is opened,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually: Map reading lamps

- when the vehicle is locked,
1. Front courtesy lamp ) With the ignition on, press the cor-
- when the ignition is switched on, responding switch.
2. Map reading lamps
- 30 seconds after the last door is
closed.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

With the permanent lighting Take care not to place any-

mode, the lighting time varies thing in contact with the cour-
according to the circumstances: tesy lamps.
- with the ignition off, approximately
3. Rear courtesy lamp ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, ap-
proximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.

VIS
99
 DOOR MIRROR SPOTLAMPS INTERIOR WELCOME LIGHTING INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING
The remote switching on of the passen- The dimmed passenger compartment
ger compartment lighting makes your lighting improves visibility in the vehicle
approach to the vehicle easier in poor when the light is poor.
light. It operates with the automatic il-
lumination of headlamps.

Switching on
) Press the open padlock on the re-
mote control.
The courtesy lamps come on; your
vehicle is also unlocked.

Switching off
To make your approach to the vehicle
easier, these illuminate: The interior welcome lighting switches
Switching on
- the zones facing the driver’s and off automatically after a set time or when At night, the front courtesy lamp mood
passenger’s doors, one of the doors is opened. lamp A comes on automatically when
- the zones forward of the door mirrors the sidelamps are switched on.
and rearward of the front doors.

Programming
Switching on Switching off
The function is activated or
The spotlamps come on: deactivated via the multi- The interior mood lighting switches off
function screen configura- automatically when the sidelamps are
- when you unlock the vehicle, tion menu. switched off.
- when you remove the key from the
ignition,
- when you open a door,
- when you use the remote control.

Switching off
The duration of the welcome
They are timed to go off automatically. lighting is associated with and
VIS

identical to that of the automatic

guide-me-home lighting.

100
 BOOT LAMP TORCH

The soft lighting provided by the footwell This comes on automatically when the Portable lamp, fitted in the boot wall,
lamps improves visibility in the vehicle boot is opened and switches off auto- which can be used to light the boot or
when the light is poor. matically when the boot is closed. as a torch.

For the torch function, refer to

Activation the "Fittings - § Torch" section.

Its operation is identical to that of the

courtesy lamps. The lighting comes on
when one of the doors is opened.
Operation
Different lighting times are
available: Once engaged firmly in its location, it
comes on automatically when the boot
- when the ignition is off, approxi- is opened and switches off automati-
mately ten minutes, cally when the boot is closed.
- in energy economy mode, approxi- It operates with NiMH type rechargeable
mately thirty seconds, batteries.
- when the engine is running, no It has a battery life of approximately
limit. 45 minutes and recharges while you
are driving.

Observe the polarities when fit-

ting the rechargeable batteries.

VIS
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal single-use batteries.

101
 INTERIOR FITTINGS

1. Spectacles storage

2. Sun visor

3. Grab handle with coat hook

4. Storage compartment

5. Storage compartment under the

steering wheel

6. Storage compartment

7. Illuminated glove box

8. Door pockets

9. Front 12 V accessory socket

(120 W)

10. Storage compartment

11. Peugeot Connect USB

12. Cup holder

13. Rear 12 V accessory socket

(120 W)
FITTINGS

102
SUN VISOR DRIVER'S STORAGE ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX
COMPARTMENTS

Component which protects against Storage box This has storage areas, audio sockets
sunlight from the front or the side, also for a portable player and a location for
equipped with an illuminated courtesy This has storage areas for the handbook the SIM card (only with Peugeot Connect
mirror. pack, ... Media), ...
) With the ignition on, raise the concealing ) To open, pull the handle then tilt the ) To open the glove box, raise the
flap; the mirror is lit automatically. box. handle.
This sun visor is also equipped with a The lamp comes on when the lid is
ticket holder. Card holder opened.

This can be used for a toll payment

ticket or parking card, for example.
To connect a portable player or
a SIM card, refer to the "Audio
and telematics" section.
Coin storage

FITTINGS
Storage

103
 CENTRE CONSOLE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB 12 V ACCESSORY SOCKETS
Storage device for the driver and front
passenger.

Storage

This connection box consists of a jack

auxiliary socket and/or a USB port. ) To connect a 12 V accessory (max
power: 120 Watts), remove the cover
It permits the connection of portable and connect a suitable adaptor.
equipment, such as a digital audio player
of the iPod® type or a USB memory stick. Exceeding the maximum power could
result in damage to your accessory.
It reads the audio file formats (mp3,
) Slide the cover for access to the ogg, wma, wav...) which are transmitted
10.5 litre storage compartment. to your audio equipment and played via
This can contain 2 half-litre bottles. the vehicle's speakers.
A ventilation outlet distributes cooled air. You can manage these files using the
steering mounted controls or the audio
equipment control panel and display
them on the multifunction screen.

When it is in use, the portable equipment

charges automatically.
FITTINGS

For more information on the

use of this equipment, re-
fer to the Peugeot Connect
Sound part of the "Audio and
Telematics" section.

104
MATS Refitting
Removable carpet protection. To refit the mat on the driver's side:
) position the mat correctly,
) refit the fixings by pressing,
) check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming

of the pedals:

- only use mats which are suited

to the fixings already present in
the vehicle; these fixings must be
used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Fitting The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access
When fitting the mat for the first time, to the pedals and hinder the operation
on the driver's side use only the fixings of the cruise control/speed limiter.
provided in the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.

Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:

FITTINGS
) move the seat as far back as possible,
) unclip the fixings,
) remove the mat.

105
 "AIRCRAFT" TYPE TABLES STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
UNDER THE REAR FOOTWELLS
Installed on the back of each front seat,
these allow you to set down objects.

Depending on the configuration, the It is located under the driver's seat

vehicle has storage compartments un- (manual adjustment).
der the footwells, located forward of the
outer rear seats. Access is via clipped
) To use the table, lower it fully until it flaps with a handle A.
locks in the low position.
) To store the table, raise it, passing Opening
the point of resistance, to the high
position. ) Raise the front of the drawer and
pull it.
Do not place heavy objects in the drawers.

On the passenger side, do not

forget to fold the "aircraft" type
FITTINGS

table before placing the seat

in the table position.
Do not place hard or heavy objects
on the table. They could become
dangerous projectiles in the event of
emergency braking or impact.

106
REAR MULTIMEDIA Two separate audio sources
can be connected via the RCA
connectors (red and white).

The audio is heard through

two wireless headphones with
Bluetooth technology which
operate with rechargeable
batteries.
The A/B button allows you to pair the
headphones with the screen: A left-
hand side, B right-hand side.

You have a 12 V charger with two out- If your seat is in the table position, po-
puts permitting simultaneous charging sition a cover to avoid damaging the
of both headphones. screen.
It is also possible to connect a 3rd set of
Bluetooth headphones.

Set-up
These covers also conceal
) With the engine running, connect your each screen.
portable system to the RCA connec-
tors (e.g. with AV1 on the left).
) Press the system's ON/OFF button,
the indicator lamp comes on and the
Multimedia system permitting the connec- AV1 indicator lamps come on.
tion of any external portable system: iPod
Video, games consoles, DVD player, … ) Press and hold the ON/OFF button on
the headphones, the indicator lamp
on the headphones flashes in blue.
) Press and hold the system's ON/
Two separate video sources OFF button, the pairing with the

FITTINGS
can be connected via the RCA headphones is complete when the
connectors (yellow). blue indicator lamps on the head-
phones and on the system (in the
shape of headphones) are on con-
The video is displayed in two tinuously.
7’’ screens, integrated in the ) Press the ON/OFF buttons in the
head restraints. screens if you have a video source.
) Start playing your portable system.

107
 PANORAMIC SUNROOF
Reinitialisation: if the blind's
Component which has a tinted glass supply is cut off while it is mov-
panoramic surface to increase the light ing, the safety anti-pinch must
and visibility in the passenger compart- be reinitialised:
ment. ) press the control until the blind is
Fitted with an electric blind in several fully closed,
sections to improve temperature and ) continue to press for at least
noise related comfort. 3 seconds. A slight movement of
the blind will then be noticeable,
confirming the reinitialisation.

- automatic mode If the blind re-opens during a closing ma-

) Pull or press control A firmly. noeuvre, and immediately after it stops:
One press opens or closes the ) pull the control until the blind is
blind completely. fully open,
Pressing the control again stops ) press the control until the blind is
the blind. fully closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.

One-touch electric blind Safety anti-pinch

If the blind meets an obstacle
In automatic mode and at the end of during operation, you must
There are two options for opening and its travel, if the blind meets an obstacle
closing: reverse the movement of the
while closing it stops and moves back blind. To do this, press the control
slightly. concerned.
- manual mode When the driver operates the blind
control, he must ensure that no one
FITTINGS

) Pull or press control A gently. is preventing correct closing of the

The blind stops when you release blind.
the control. The driver must ensure that passen-
gers use the blind correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the blind.

108
BOOT FITTINGS
(5 SEAT VERSION)

1. Load space cover

2. Hooks
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
4. Torch
5. Concertina boards
6. Stowing rings on the floor
7. Cup holder
8. Storage compartments or audio
amplifier
9. Storage compartment under the
floor

FITTINGS
109
 BOOT FITTINGS
(7 SEAT VERSION)

1. Load space cover

2. Hooks

3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)

4. Torch

5. Concertina boards

6. Stowing rings on the floor

7. Cup holder

8. Armrests

9. Storage compartments or audio

amplifier

10. 3rd row seat belt buckles

FITTINGS

110
Roller load space cover

To remove the load space cover:

) remove the load space cover guides
from the rails on the boot pillars,
) reel in the load space cover in its
roller,

) pivot the ends of the roller upwards To install the load space cover:
to release it, ) position one of the ends of the roller
) remove the roller from its support. in its support,
) insert the second end in its support,
) pivot the ends of the roller down-
wards to secure it,
) reel out the load space cover to the
boot pillars,
) insert the load space screen guides
in the rails on the boot pillars.
To store the load space cover, roller
uppermost and flap facing towards the
inside of the vehicle:
) place the right-hand end in its housing,
) slide the left-hand end into the guide
then into its housing, If you use the 3rd row seats
(7 seat version), it is essential
to store the roller in its housing.

FITTINGS
) secure the assembly by pivoting the
ends downwards.

The roller has two rings for

fixing the luggage retaining
net depending on its location.

111
 High load retaining net*

Hooked onto the special upper and lower

fixings, this permits use of the entire load-
ing volume up to the roof:
- behind the front seats (row 1) when
the rear seats are folded.
- behind the rear seats (row 2).

When positioning the net,

check that the strap loops are To use it in row 1: To use it in row 2:
visible from the boot; this will
make slackening or tightening easier. ) fold the rear seats, ) roll up or remove the load space
) open the covers of the upper fixings 1, screen,
) unroll the high load retaining net, ) open the covers of the upper fixings 2,
) position one of the ends of the net's ) unroll the high load retaining net,
metal bar in the corresponding up- ) position one of the ends of the net's
per fixing 1, then do the same with metal bar in the corresponding up-
the other end, per fixing 2, then do the same with
) slacken the straps fully, the other end,
) fix the snap hook of each of the ) fix the snap hook of each of the
straps on the corresponding Top straps in the corresponding stowing
Tether ring 3 (located on the back of ring 4,
the folded rear side seats), ) tighten the straps,
) tighten the straps, ) check that the net is hooked and
) check that the net is hooked and tightened correctly.
tightened correctly.
FITTINGS

* If your vehicle is equipped with this.

112
Luggage retaining net There are 4 possible positions:

Hooked onto the stowing rings on the

floor and/or on the load space cover
roller, the luggage retaining net avail-
able as an accessory enables you to
secure your luggage.

- flat at the bottom of the boot, - vertical at the back of the rear seats,

FITTINGS
- horizontal, level with the load space - flat at the bottom of the boot and ver-
cover, tical at the back of the rear seats.
 Hooks 12 V accessory socket Storage box (5 seat version)

The hooks permit the securing of shop- ) To connect a 12 V accessory (max ) Raise the concertina board to gain
ping bags. power: 120 W), remove the cap and access to the storage box.
connect an appropriate adaptor. Depending on the configuration, this
) Turn the key to the ignition position. has areas for storing:
- a box of spare bulbs,
- a first aid kit,
- a tyre repair kit,
- two warning triangles,
- ...
FITTINGS

114
Torch Rear side blinds
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the Fitted on the rear windows, these protect
boot wall, which can be used to illumi- your young children from the sun.
nate the boot or as a torch.
2nd row
For the boot lighting function,
refer to the "Visibility - § Boot
lamp" section.

Use
) Extract the torch from its location
pulling the side of the torch A.
) Press the switch, located on the
back, to switch the torch on or off.
) Unfold the support, located on the
back, to set down and raise the
torch; for example, when changing
a wheel.

Storing
Operation ) Put the torch back in place in its loca-
This torch operates with NiMH type tion starting with the narrow part B.
rechargeable batteries. If you have forgotten to switch off
It has a battery life of approximately the torch, this switches it off auto-
45 minutes and charges while you are matically.
driving.

FITTINGS
3rd row (7 seat version)

Observe the polarities when It the torch is not engaged cor-

fitting the batteries. rectly, it may not charge and ) Pull the blind by the central tab.
may not come on when the ) Position the blind attachment on the
Never replace the rechargeable batteries boot is opened. hook.
with normal single-use batteries.

115
 CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
TO CHILD SEATS
"Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"
Although one of PEUGEOT's main cri- When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is When a "forwards-facing" child seat is
teria when designing your vehicle, the installed on the front passenger seat, installed on the front passenger seat,
safety of your children also depends on it is essential that the passenger airbag adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully
you. is deactivated. Otherwise, the child back and highest position with the seat
For maximum safety, please observe would risk being seriously injured or back upright and leave the passenger's
the following recommendations: killed if the airbag were to inflate. airbag activated.
- in accordance with European reg-
ulations, all children under the
age of 12 or less than one and a
half metres tall must travel in ap-
proved child seats suited to their
weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying children
are the rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-fac-
ing" position both in the front and
in the rear.

Passenger seat in the fully back and

highest position.
CHILD SAFETY

PEUGEOT recommends that Ensure that the seat belt is

children should travel in the correctly tensioned.
outer rear seats of your ve-
hicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the age of 2.

* The rules for carrying children are

specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
116
Passenger airbag OFF Refer to the advice given on the label
present on both sides of the passen-
ger's sun visor.

CHILD SAFETY
To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passenger's For more information on de-
front airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing position activating the airbag, refer
on the front passenger's seat. to the "Safety" section then
Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed "Airbags".
if the airbag were deployed.

117
 CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt:

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

L1
"RÖMER/BRITAX Baby-Safe Plus". L2
Installed in the rearwards-facing "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX".
position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L5
L4 "KLIPPAN Optima".
"RECARO Start''. From the age of 6 years
(approximately 22 kg),
the booster is used on its own.
CHILD SAFETY

L6
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be secured using the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.

118
INSTALLING A CHILD SEAT WITH A STAY
Care must be taken when installing a child seat with stay (a drop down leg) in the vehicle. In particular you should look for the
presence of a storage compartment below the rear seat footwells.

At the bottom of the storage Away from the storage

Do not place the stay on the
storage compartment cover; compartment compartment area
it might break in a serious im- If the stay is long enough, you can ad- Another possibility, if the stay is long
pact. Where the adjustments just it so that it contact the bottom of enough and can be inclined sufficiently
of the stay allow it, we suggest two the storage compartment. Remove all (always by following the recommenda-
other possibilities for installation. objects from the storage compartment tions given the installation instructions
The centre rear seat does not have before installing the stay. for the child seat), is to position the stay
a storage compartment below the so that it contacts the floor away from
footwell. You can therefore easily the storage compartment. Adjust the

CHILD SAFETY
fit a child seat with a stay, whether longitudinal position of the front or rear
Isofix or universal (installed using the seat to obtain a satisfactory position for
3 point seat belt). the stay away from the storage com-
partment.

If you cannot fit the stay in way

described, we recommend
that you do not fit a child seat
with stay to this seat.

119
 INSTALLING CHILD SEATS USING THE SEAT BELT
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt
and universally approved (a) in accordance with the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child and indicative age

Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Up to approx 1 year 1 to 3 years approx 3 to 6 years approx 6 to 10 years approx

Front passenger
seat (c) with U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
height adjuster

Front passenger
seat (c) without X X X X
height adjuster

5 seats (2 rows)

Outer
rear seats U* U* U* U*
CHILD SAFETY

Centre U U U U
rear seat

To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards sufficiently so that front seat
backrest is not in the way.

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat
with a stay" for more information.
120
 Weight of the child and indicative age

Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Up to approx 1 year 1 to 3 years approx 3 to 6 years approx 6 to 10 years approx

Front passenger
seat (c) with height U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
adjuster
Front passenger
seat (c) without X X X X
height adjuster
7 seats (3 rows)

Outer rear seats U* U* U* U*

2nd row

Centre rear U U U U
seat 2nd row

Rear seats U U U U
3rd row

When the KIDDY Life (L3) is installed with its booster on the front passenger seat, the vehicle's seat must be adjusted to

CHILD SAFETY
its maximum forwards position and the airbag must be deactivated.

a: universal child seat, child seat that can be installed in all vehicles using a seat belt.
b: group 0, from birth to 10 kg. Shells seats and baby carriers cannot be installed in the front passenger seat.
c: consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, "rearwards-facing"
and/or "forwards-facing".
U (R): idem U, with the vehicle's seat adjusted to the highest position.
L-: only the child seats indicated can be installed on the seat concerned (according to country).
X: seat position not suitable for installation of a child seat for the weight class indicated.
* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat
with a stay" for more information.
121
 ADVICE ON CHILD Children under the age of 10 must To prevent accidental opening of
SEATS not travel in the "forwards-facing" the doors and rear windows, use
position on the front passenger seat, the "Child lock".
The incorrect installation of a child unless the rear seats are already oc- Take care not to open the rear win-
seat in a vehicle compromises the cupied by other children, cannot be dows by more than one third.
child's protection in the event of an used or are absent.
To protect young children from the
accident. Deactivate the passenger airbag rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the
Remember to fasten the seat belts or when a "rearwards-facing" child seat rear windows.
the child seat harnesses keeping the is installed on the front seat.
slack relative to the child's body to a Otherwise, the child would risk being
minimum, even for short journeys. seriously injured or killed if the airbag
When installing a child seat using the were to inflate.
seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is
tightened correctly on the child seat
and that it secures the child seat firm-
ly on the seat of your vehicle. Move
the seat forwards if necessary.
Installing a booster seat
For optimum installation of the "for-
wards-facing" child seat, ensure that The chest part of the seat belt must
the back of the child seat is in contact be positioned on the child's shoulder
with the back of the vehicle's seat without touching the neck.
and that the head restraint does not Ensure that the lap part of the seat
cause any discomfort. belt passes correctly over the child's
If the head restraint has to be removed, thighs.
ensure that it is stored or attached se- PEUGEOT recommends the use of
curely to prevent it from being thrown a booster seat which has a back, fit-
around the vehicle in the event of ted with a seat belt guide at shoulder
sharp braking. level.
CHILD SAFETY

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

- a child or children alone and un-
supervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children
inside the vehicle.

122
"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS There are three rings for each seat: This ISOFIX mounting system provides
- two rings A, located between the fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child
Your vehicle has been approved in ac- vehicle seat back and cushion, indi- seat in your vehicle.
cordance with the latest ISOFIX regu- cated by a label,
lations.
- a ring B, behind the seat, referred to The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with
The seats, represented below, are fitted as the TOP TETHER for fixing the
with regulation ISOFIX mountings: two latches which are easily secured on
upper strap. the two rings A.

Some also have an upper strap which

is attached to ring B.

To attach this strap, raise the vehicle

seat's head restraint then pass the hook
between its rods. Then fix the hook on
ring B and tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
For information regarding the ISOFIX
5 seats child seats which can be installed in
your vehicle, refer to the table showing
the locations for installing ISOFIX child
seats.

CHILD SAFETY
7 seats

123
 ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX

(size category B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed only in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
) Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the back of the seat.

This child seat can also be

used on seats which are not
fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to
the vehicle seat using the three point
CHILD SAFETY

seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting
the child seat given in the seat
manufacturer's installation guide.

124
SEATING POSITIONS FOR INSTALLING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the
vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter between A
and G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of the child/indicative age

Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to approx. 1 year
"rearwards-
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"
facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1

Front passenger seat X X X X

5 seats (2 rows)

CHILD SAFETY
IUF*
Outer rear seats IL-SU* IL-SU* IL-SU*
IL-SU*

IUF
Centre rear seat X IL-SU IL-SU
IL-SU

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat
with a stay" for more information.
To install a child seat in a rear seat, facing forwards or backwards, slide the rear seat backwards sufficiently so that front seat
backrest is not in the way. ./..
125
 Weight of the child/indicative age

Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
6 months (group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"

ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1

Front passenger seat X X X X

7 seats (3 rows)

Outer rear IUF*

IL-SU* IL-SU* IL-SU*
seats 2nd row IL-SU*

Centre rear IUF

X IL-SU IL-SU
seat 2nd row IL-SU
CHILD SAFETY

Rear seats Not Isofix

3rd row

* Precautions are required when fitting a child seat with a stay (or drop down leg). Refer to the page "Installing a child seat
with a stay" for more information.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forwards-facing" secured using the top belt.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt or a stay,
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,
- a shell seat fitted with an upper strap or a stay.
For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to the paragraph "Isofix mountings".
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or shell for the weight group indicated.
126
MANUAL CHILD LOCK ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK Switching off
) With the ignition on, press this but-
Mechanical system to prevent opening Remote control system to prevent open- ton again.
of the rear door using its interior control. ing of the rear doors using their interior
controls and use of the rear electric win- The indicator lamp in the button goes
The control is located on the edge of off, accompanied by a message to con-
each rear door. dows.
firm that the child lock is off.
This indicator lamp remains off while
the child lock is switched off.

Locking Switching on

Any other status of the indica-

tor lamp indicates a fault with
the electric child lock.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

This system is independent

and in no circumstances does
it take the place of the central
) Turn the red control one eighth of a ) With the ignition on, press this button. locking control.
turn using the ignition key as shown Check the status of the child lock

CHILD SAFETY
The indicator lamp in the button comes
in the label on the door. Check that on, accompanied by a message to con- each time you switch on the ignition.
the lock is on. firm that the child lock is on. Always remove the key from the igni-
This indicator lamp remains on until the tion when leaving the vehicle, even
child lock is switched off. for a short time.
It is still possible to open the doors from In the event of a serious impact, the
Unlocking electric child lock is switched off au-
the outside and operate the rear elec-
) Turn the red control one eighth of a tric windows from the driver's control tomatically to permit the exit of the
turn using the ignition key. panel. rear passengers.

127
 DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LAMPS HORN
A visual warning by means of the direc- Audible warning to alert other road us-
tion indicators to alert other road users to ers to an imminent danger.
a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

) Lower the lighting control stalk fully

when moving to the left.
) Raise the lighting control stalk fully
when moving to the right.

) Tilt or press button A, the direction ) Press one of the spokes of the steering
indicators flash. wheel.
If you forget to cancel the direc- They can operate with the ignition off.
tion indicators for more than
twenty seconds, the volume of
the audible signal will increase if the Use the horn moderately and
speed is above 40 mph (60 km/h). only in the following cases:

Automatic operation of hazard - immediate danger,

warning lamps - overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
"Motorway" function When braking in an emergency, de- - when approaching an area where
Move the stalk briefly upwards or down- pending on the deceleration, the hazard there is no visibility.
wards, without going beyond the point of warning lamps come on automatically.
resistance; the corresponding direction They switch off automatically the first
indicators will flash 3 times. time you accelerate.
) You can also switch them off by
pressing the button.
SAF

128
TYRE UNDER-INFLATION Puncture
All repairs and changing of
DETECTION The STOP warning lamp tyres on a wheel fitted with this
System which automatically checks the comes on, accompanied system must be carried out by
pressure of the tyres while driving. by an audible signal and a a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
message in the multifunc- workshop.
tion screen identifying the If, when changing a tyre, you install
wheel concerned. a wheel which is not detected by
) Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, your vehicle (example: fitting of snow
avoiding any sudden movement of tyres), you must have the system re-
the steering wheel and the brakes. initialised by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
) Change the damaged wheel (punc- qualified workshop.
tured or very deflated tyre), and
have the tyre pressure checked as
soon as possible.

Sensor(s) not detected or faulty This system does not avoid the
A message appears in the multifunc- need to have the tyre pressures
Sensors fitted in each valve trigger a tion screen, accompanied by an audible checked regularly (refer to the
warning in the event of malfunction signal, to identify the wheel or wheels "Identification markings" section) to en-
(speed above 12 mph (20 km/h)). which are not detected or to indicate a sure that the optimum dynamic perfor-
The spare wheel is not fitted with a sensor. fault in the system. mance of the vehicle is maintained and
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali- prevent premature wear of the tyres,
fied workshop to replace the faulty particularly in arduous driving conditions
sensor(s). (heavy load, high speed).
The tyre under-inflation detec- The tyre pressures must be checked
tion system is an aid to driving cold, at least once a month. Remember to
which does not replace the check the pressure of the spare wheel.
need for the driver to be vigilant or to
drive responsibly. The tyre under-inflation detection
system may experience temporary
Under-inflated tyre interference due to electromagnetic
This message is also dis- emissions on a frequency close to
This warning lamp is displayed in the played when one of the wheels that used by the system.
instrument panel and/or a message is away from the vehicle (being
appears in the multifunction screen, repaired) or when one or more wheels
accompanied by an audible signal, without a sensor are fitted.
to identify the wheel concerned.

SAF
) Check the tyre pressures as soon
as possible.
This check must be carried out when
the tyres are cold.
129
 ELECTRONIC STABILITY Anti-skid regulation (ASR)
PROGRAMME (ESC) The ASR system (also known as Trac-
tion Control) optimises traction in order Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
Electronic Stability Programme (ESC: to avoid wheel slip by acting on the electronic brake force distribution
Electronic Stability Control) incorporating brakes of the driving wheels and on the (EBFD)
the following systems: engine. It also improves the directional When this warning lamp
- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) stability of the vehicle on acceleration. comes on, accompanied by an
and the electronic brake force distri- audible signal and a message,
bution (EBFD), Dynamic stability control (DSC) it indicates that there is a fault
- the emergency braking assistance, If there is a difference between the path with the ABS, which could cause loss of
followed by the vehicle and that re- control of the vehicle when braking.
- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or
traction control, quired by the driver, the DSC monitors
each wheel and automatically acts on
- the dynamic stability control (DSC). the brake of one or more wheels and
on the engine to return the vehicle to When this warning lamp
the required path, within the limits of the comes on, coupled with the
Definitions laws of physics. STOP warning lamp, accom-
panied by an audible signal
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and and a message, it indicates that there
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) is a fault with the electronic brake force
Snow driving assistance
This system improves the stability and (Intelligent Traction Control) distribution (EBFD), which could cause
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
braking and offers improved control in Your vehicle has a system to help driving
corners, in particular on poor or slippery on snow: Intelligent Traction Control. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
road surfaces.
This automatic system continuously In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the checks for situations of difficult surface dealer or a qualified workshop.
event of emergency braking. adhesion that could make it difficult to
The electronic brake force distribution move off or make progress on deep
system manages the braking pressure fresh snow or compacted snow. When changing wheels (tyres
wheel by wheel. In these situations, Intelligent Traction and rims), make sure that
Control limits the amount of wheel slip to these are approved for your
Emergency braking assistance vehicle.
provide the best traction and trajectory control.
In an emergency, this system enables Normal operation of the ABS may
you to reach the optimum braking pres- In extremely severe conditions (deep snow,
mud…), it can be useful to temporarily de- make itself felt by slight vibrations of
sure more quickly and therefore reduce the brake pedal.
the stopping distance. activate the ESP/ASR systems to allow a
degree of wheel spin and so recover grip.
It is triggered in relation to the speed at
which the brake pedal is pressed. This It is recommended that the system be
is felt by a reduction in the resistance of reactivated as soon as possible.
In emergency braking, press
SAF

the pedal and an increase in the effec- Snow tyres are strongly recommended on very firmly without releasing
tiveness of the braking. surfaces offering low levels of adhesion. the pressure.

130
 Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on,

accompanied by an audible sig-
nal and a message in the multi-
function screen, this indicates a
malfunction of the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
fied workshop to have the system
checked.
) Press the "ESP OFF" button.

This warning lamp and the indi-

cator lamp in the button come The DSC system offers excep-
on: the DSC system no longer tional safety in normal driving,
Dynamic stability control (DSC) but this should not encourage the
acts on the operation of the inter-
nal combustion engine. driver to take extra risks or drive at high
Activation speed.
This system is activated automatically The correct functioning of the system
each time the vehicle is started. depends on observation of the manu-
facturer's recommendations regarding
It comes into operation in the event of a the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking
grip or trajectory problem. components, the electronic components
and the PEUGEOT assembly and op-
eration procedures.
This is indicated by flashing of this After an impact, have the system
warning lamp in the instrument checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
panel. qualified workshop.
Reactivation
The system is reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back
Deactivation on or from 30 mph (50 km/h).
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on ) Press the "ESP OFF" button again
soft ground...), it may be advisable to deac- to reactivate it manually.
tivate the DSC system, so that the wheels
can move freely and regain grip.

SAF
131
 SEAT BELTS Fastening Height adjustment

) Pull the strap, then insert the tongue ) To adjust the anchorage point,
in the buckle. squeeze the control A and slide it
) Check that the seat belt is fastened until you find a notch.
correctly by pulling the strap.

Front seat belts Unfastening Front seat belt not fastened/

) Press the red button on the buckle. unfastened warning lamp
The front seat belts are fitted with a preten- When the ignition is switched
sioning and force limiting system. ) Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
on, this warning lamp comes
This system improves safety in the front on on the seat belt and pas-
seats in the event of a front or side impact. senger's front airbag warning
Depending on the severity of the impact, lamps display, if the driver and/or the
the pretensioning system instantly tightens front passenger has not fastened their
the seat belts against the body of the oc- seat belt.
cupants. From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h)
The pretensioning seat belts are active this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
when the ignition is on. accompanied by an audible signal. Once
The force limiter reduces the pressure of these two minutes have elapsed, this
the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, warning lamp remains on until the driver
SAF

so improving their protection. and/or the front passenger fastens their

seat belt.

132
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened Rear seat belts Seat belt unfastened warning lamps
warning lamps display display
The rear seats are each fitted with a
three-point inertia reel seat belt with
force limiter (with the exception of the
centre rear seat).

Fastening
) Pull the strap, then insert the tongue
in the buckle.
) Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening
) Press the red button on the buckle.
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fas- ) Guide the seat belt as it reels in. When the ignition is switched on, with
tened/unfastened warning lamp. the engine running or when the vehicle is
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp. moving at less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the
corresponding warning lamps 4 to 8 come
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp. on in red for approximately 30 seconds, if
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. the seat belt is not fastened.
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. Seat belt unfastened warning lamp
When the vehicle is moving at more than
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp. 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding
This warning lamp comes on on warning lamp 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 comes on in
the seat belt and passenger's red, accompanied by an audible signal and
front airbag warning lamps dis- a message on the multifunction screen, if a
The corresponding warning lamp 2 or 3 play, when one or more rear
comes on in red on the seat belt and rear passenger has unfastened their seat
passengers unfasten their seat belt. belt.
passenger's front airbag warning lamps
display if the seat belt is not fastened or From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
is unfastened. this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
accompanied by an audible signal. Once
these two minutes have elapsed, this
7 seat version warning lamp remains on until the one or
more rear passengers fasten their seat
7. 3rd row rear left seat belt warning belt.
lamp To prevent movement of the
8. 3rd row rear right seat belt warning rear side seat belts in the
lamp. 2nd row, slide the straps into
the guides provided for this
purpose.

133
 2nd row rear centre seat belt 3rd row rear seat belts
(7 seat version)

The seat belt for the rear centre seat of The seat belts for the rear seats of the
the 2nd row is incorporated at the rear 3rd row are incorporated at the corner
right of the roof. of the corresponding boot pillar and of
the roof.

Installation Installation
) Pull the strap and insert the tongue A ) Pull the strap and insert the tongue C
in the right-hand buckle. in the buckle, on the boot side trim
) Insert the tongue B in the left-hand side.
buckle. ) Insert the tongue D in the opposite
) Check the fastening of each buckle buckle.
by pulling the strap. ) Check the fastening of each buckle
by pulling the strap.

Removal and storing Removal and storing

) Press the red button on the buckle B, ) Press the red button on the buckle D,
then on the buckle A. then on the buckle C.
SAF

) Guide the strap as it reels in and ) Guide the strap as it reels in and the
bring the tongue B, then A onto the tongues D and C.
magnet of the attachment point on
the roof.

134
 The driver must ensure that In order to be effective, a seat belt Recommendations for children
passengers use the seat belts must: Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body senger is less than 12 years old or
restrained securely before setting off. as possible, shorter than one and a half metres.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a Never use the same seat belt to secure
always fasten your seat belt, even for smooth movement, checking that more than one person.
short journeys. it does not twist, Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
Do not interchange the seat belt - be used to restrain only one person,
buckles as they will not fulfil their role
fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia - not be converted or modified to
reel permitting automatic adjustment avoid affecting its performance.
of the length of the strap to your size. In accordance with current safety
The seat belt is stowed automatically regulations, for all repairs on your In the event of an impact
when not in use. vehicle, go to a qualified workshop Depending on the nature and se-
Before and after use, ensure that the with the skills and equipment need- riousness of the impact, the pre-
seat belt is reeled in correctly. ed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able tensioning device may be deployed
to provide. before and independently of the
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the Have your seat belts checked regu- airbags. Deployment of the preten-
pelvis. larly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a sioners is accompanied by a slight
qualified workshop, particularly if the discharge of harmless smoke and
The upper part must be positioned in straps show signs of damage. a noise, due to the activation of the
the hollow of the shoulder. pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
The inertia reels are fitted with an au- water or a textile cleaning product, the system.
tomatic locking device which comes sold by PEUGEOT dealers. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
into operation in the event of a collision, comes on.
emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls After folding or moving a seat or rear
over. You can release the device by bench seat, ensure that the seat belt Following an impact, have the seat
pulling firmly on the strap and releasing is positioned and reeled in correctly. belts system checked, and if neces-
it so that it reels in slightly. sary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.

SAF
135
 AIRBAGS Impact detection zones Front airbags
System designed to maximise the safety System which protects the driver and
of the occupants (with the exception of front passenger in the event of a seri-
the rear centre passenger) in the event ous front impact in order to limit the risk
of violent collisions. It supplements the of injury to the head and thorax.
action of the force-limiting seat belts The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of
(with the exception of the rear centre the steering wheel; the front passenger's
passenger). airbag is fitted in the dashboard above
If a collision occurs, the electronic de- the glove box.
tectors record and analyse the front and
side impacts sustained in the impact
detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the
airbags are deployed instantly and
protect the occupants of the vehicle
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger); immediately after the A. Front impact zone.
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly B. Side impact zone.
so that they do not hinder visibility
or the exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact
or in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the
seat belt alone is sufficient to pro- Deployment of the airbag(s) is
vide optimum protection in these accompanied by a slight emis-
situations. sion of harmless smoke and Deployment
a noise, due to the activation of the
pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in The airbags are deployed simultaneously,
the system. unless the passenger's front airbag is de-
The airbags do not oper- activated, in the event of a serious front im-
This smoke is not harmful, but sensi- pact to all or part of the front impact zone A,
ate when the ignition is tive individuals may experience slight
switched off. in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
irritation. on a horizontal plane and directed from the
This equipment will only deploy once. The noise of the detonation may result front to the rear of the vehicle.
If a second impact occurs (during the in a slight loss of hearing for a short
same or a subsequent accident), the The front airbag inflates between the tho-
time. rax and head of the front occupant of the
airbag will not be deployed again.
vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's
SAF

side, and the dashboard, passenger's side

to cushion their forward movement.

136
Deactivation If this warning lamp flashes in the
To assure the safety of your instrument panel and/or in the
Only the passenger's front airbag can child, the passenger's front
be deactivated: seat belt and passenger's front
airbag must be deactivated airbag warning lamps display,
) with the ignition off, insert the key when you install a "rear facing" child contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
in the passenger airbag deactivation seat on the front passenger seat. qualified workshop. The passenger's front
switch, Otherwise, the child would risk being airbag may no longer be deployed in the
) turn it to the "OFF" position, seriously injured or killed if the airbag event of a serious impact.
) then, remove the key keeping the were deployed.
switch in the new position.

Reactivation
If even one of the two airbag
When you remove the child seat, turn warning lamps comes on con-
the switch to the "ON" position to re- tinuously, do not install a child
activate the airbag and so assure the seat on the front passenger seat.
safety of your front passenger in the
event of an impact. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

With the ignition on, this warning

lamp comes on in the seat belt and
passenger's front airbag warning
lamps display for approximately
one minute, if the passenger's front
airbag is activated.
According to version, this
warning lamp comes on in Operating fault
the instrument panel and/or in
the seat belt and passenger's If this warning lamp comes on in
front airbag warning lamps the instrument panel, accompa-
display when the ignition is on and until nied by an audible warning and a
the airbag is reactivated. message in the screen, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.

SAF
137
 Lateral airbags The lateral airbag inflates between the Deployment
front occupant of the vehicle and the The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
System which protects the driver and front corresponding door panel. time as the corresponding lateral airbag in
passenger in the event of a serious side the event of a serious side impact applied
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to to all or part of the side impact zone B, per-
the chest. pendicular to the longitudinal centreline of
Impact detection zones
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front, in the vehicle on a horizontal plane and di-
the outer side of the seat back frame. rected from the outside towards the inside
of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the
front or rear occupant of the vehicle and
the windows.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in

the instrument panel, accompa-
nied by an audible signal and a
message in the screen, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
A. Front impact zone. fied workshop to have the system checked.
B. Side impact zone. The airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.

Curtain airbags
Deployment In the event of a minor impact
System which protects the driver and
The lateral airbags are deployed unilater- passengers (with the exception of the or bump on the side of the
ally in the event of a serious side impact rear centre passenger) in the event of a vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
applied to all or part of the side impact serious side impact in order to limit the over, the airbag may not be
zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal risk of injury to the side of the head. deployed.
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal In the event of a rear or front collision,
plane and directed from the outside to- Each curtain airbag is built into the pil-
lars and the upper passenger compart- the airbag is not deployed.
wards the inside of the vehicle.
ment area.
SAF

138
 For the airbags to be fully Front airbags Lateral airbags
effective, observe the Do not drive holding the steering Use only approved covers on the seats,
following safety rules: wheel by its spokes or resting your compatible with the deployment the later-
Sit in a normal upright position. hands on the centre part of the al airbags. For information on the range
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. wheel. of seat covers suitable for your vehicle,
Passengers must not place their feet you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer
Do not leave anything between the (see "Practical information - § Accesso-
occupants and the airbags (a child, on the dashboard.
ries").
pet, object...). This could hamper the If possible, do not smoke as deploy-
operation of the airbags or injure the ment of the airbags can cause burns Do not fix or attach anything to the
occupants. or the risk of injury from a cigarette seat backs (clothing...). This could
or pipe. cause injury to the chest or arms if
After an accident or if the vehicle has the lateral airbag is deployed.
been stolen or broken into, have the Never remove or pierce the steering
airbag systems checked. wheel or hit it violently. Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
All work on the airbag system must necessary.
be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when
an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled
out. The bag inflates almost instantly Curtain airbags
(within a few milliseconds) then deflates
within the same time discharging the Do not fix or attach anything to the roof.
hot gas via openings provided for this This could cause injury to the head if the
purpose. curtain airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not re-
move the grab handles installed on
the roof, they play a part in securing
the curtain airbags.

SAF
139
 Programming the mode
Depending on the country of registration
of the vehicle, the automatic application
when the engine is switched off and the
automatic release when you press the
accelerator can be deactivated.
Activation/deactivation of
this function is possible by
a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.

The parking brake is then applied and

released manually. When the driver's
door is opened, there is an audible sig-
nal and a message is displayed if the
The electric parking brake combines brake is not applied.
2 operational modes:
- Automatic application/release
Application is automatic when the Deactivation is recommended Do not place any object (packet
engine stops, release is automatic in particularly cold conditions of cigarettes, telephone, ...) be-
on use of the accelerator (activated (ice) and during towing (break- hind the electric brake control.
by default), down, caravan...). Refer to the
- Manual application/release "Manual release" paragraph.
The parking brake can be applied/
released manually by pulling control
lever A.

If this warning lamp comes

on in the instrument panel,
the automatic mode is deac-
tivated.

140
Manual application Manual release Maximum application
With the ignition on or the engine run- If necessary, you can make a maxi-
ning, to release the parking brake, mum application of the parking brake.
press on the brake pedal or the ac- It is obtained by means of a long pull
celerator, pull then release the control on the control lever A, until you see the
lever A. message "Handbrake on" and a beep
Full application of the parking brake is is heard.
confirmed by:
Maximum application is essential:
- the braking warning lamp - in the case of a vehicle towing a
and of the warning lamp P caravan or a trailer, if the automatic
in the the control lever A go- functions are activated but you are
ing off, applying the parking brake manually,
- display of the message "Hand- - when the gradient you are parked
brake off". on is variable in its effect (e.g. on a
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the ferry, in a lorry, during towing).
parking brake whether the engine is run-
ning or off, pull on the control lever A. If you pull the control lever A
without pressing the brake ped-
Application of the parking brake is con- al, the parking brake will not be
firmed by: released and a warning lamp
- illumination of the braking will come on in the instrument
warning lamp and of the panel.
warning lamp P in the con-
trol lever A, In the case of towing, a loaded
- display of the message "Hand- vehicle or parking on a gradi-
brake on". ent, make a maximum applica-
tion of the parking brake then turn the
front wheels towards the pavement
When the driver’s door is opened with and engage a gear when you park.
the engine running, a beep is heard and After a maximum application, the re-
a message is displayed if the parking lease time will be longer.
brake has not been applied, unless the
selector lever is in position P (Park) in
the case of an automatic gearbox.

Before leaving the vehicle,

check that parking brake

DR
warning lamp in the instru-
ment panel is on, not flashing.

141
 Automatic application, Automatic release
engine off engine running
The electric parking brake releases au-
With the vehicle stationary, the parking tomatically and progressively when With the engine running and the vehicle
brake is automatically applied when you press the accelerator: stationary, in order to immobilise the ve-
the engine is switched off. ) Manual gearbox: press down fully hicle it is essential to manually apply
The application of the parking brake is on the clutch pedal, engage first the parking brake by pulling on control
confirmed by: gear or reverse, press on the accel- lever A.
erator pedal and move off. The application of the parking brake is
) Electronic gear control gearbox: confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking warn-
ing lamp and of the warning select position A, M or R then press - illumination of the braking
lamp P in the control lever A, on the accelerator pedal. warning lamp and the warning
- display of the message ) Automatic gearbox: select posi- lamp P in the control lever A,
"Handbrake on". tion D, M or R then press on the ac- - display of the message "Hand-
celerator pedal. brake on".

An audible signal will confirm to you

the application/release of your electric When the driver’s door is opened, an
parking brake. audible signal heard and a message is
displayed if the parking brake has not
been applied, unless the selector lever
Before leaving the vehicle, check Full release of the parking brake is con- is in position P (Park) in the case of an
that parking brake warning lamp firmed by: automatic gearbox.
in the instrument panel is on (not - the braking warning lamp
flashing). and of the warning lamp P in Label on the door panel
Never leave a child alone inside the the control lever A going off,
vehicle with the ignition on, as they - display of the message
could release the parking brake. "Handbrake off".

In the case of towing, a loaded vehi- When stationary, with the engine
cle or parking on a gradient, turn the running, do not press the acceler-
front wheels towards the pavement ator pedal unnecessarily, as you
and engage a gear when you park. may release the parking brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, check
that parking brake warning lamp
DRI

in the instrument panel is on, not

flashing.

142
 EMERGENCY BRAKING If a failure of the ESP system is
Particular situations signalled by the illumination of
this warning lamp, then brak-
In certain situations (e.g. start- ing stability is not guaranteed.
ing the engine), the parking brake
can automatically alter its force. This In this event, stability must be
is normal operation. assured by the driver by repeating al-
ternate "pull release" actions on control
To advance your vehicle a few cen- lever A.
timetres without starting the engine,
but with the ignition on, press on the
brake pedal and release the park-
ing brake by pulling then releasing The emergency braking must
control lever A. The full release of only be used in exceptional
the parking brake is confirmed by the circumstances.
warning lamp in the control lever A
and the warning lamp in the instru-
ment panel going off and the display
of the message "Handbrake off".
If a parking brake fault occurs while In the event of a failure of the main ser-
applied or if the battery runs flat, an vice brake or in an exceptional situation
emergency release is always pos- (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction,
sible. etc) a continuous pull on the control
lever A will stop the vehicle.
The electronic stability programme
(ESP) provides stability during emer-
gency braking.
If there is a fault with the emergency
braking, one of the following messages
will be displayed:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".

DR
143
 Emergency release ) Immobilise the vehicle (or keep ) Remove the release device and store
it stationary, if the brake pedal is it with the blocks in the toolbox.
pressed), with the engine running, - The operation of the parking brake re-
by engaging first gear (manual gear- initialises when the ignition is switched
box), position P (automatic gearbox) off then on again. If the reinitialisation
or M or R (6-speed electronic gear of the parking brake proves impos-
control gearbox). sible, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
) Switch off the engine but leave the qualified workshop.
ignition on. If it is impossible to im- - The subsequent time required for ap-
mobilise the vehicle, do not operate plication may be longer than during
the control and contact a PEUGEOT normal operation.
dealer or a qualified workshop ur-
gently.
) Fetch the two vehicle blocks and
the release device, located under
the boot carpet (see "Changing a
wheel" in the "Practical information"
Front left seat moved back fully. section).
In the event of the electric parking brake For safety reasons, you must
) Immobilise the vehicle by placing contact a PEUGEOT dealer
malfunctioning or the battery running blocks in front and behind one of the
flat, an emergency manual device can as soon as possible to replace
front wheels. the protective cover.
release the parking brake. ) Slide the front left-hand seat back Following an emergency unlocking,
as far as possible. immobilisation of the vehicle is no
) Lift up the floor plug B in the carpet longer guaranteed once the manual
under the seat. emergency release has been de-
) Pierce the protective cover C on the ployed and the manual control does
tube D with the release device. not allow the re-application of your
) Place the release device in the tube D. parking brake.
) Turn the release device clockwise. Take no action, either on the control
For safety reasons, it is essential lever A, or stopping or starting the
to continue turning the device as far engine while the release device is
as it will go. The parking brake is re- engaged.
leased. Take care not to allow moisture or
dust in the proximity of the protective
cover.
DRI

144
HILL START ASSIST Operation
System which keeps your vehicle im-
mobilised temporarily (approximately
2 seconds) when starting on a gradi-
ent, the time it takes to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal.
This system only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary,
with your foot on the brake pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the ve- On a descending slope, with the ve-
hicle stationary, the vehicle is held hicle stationary and reverse gear
for a momentarily when you release engaged, the vehicle is held momen-
the brake pedal: tarily when you release the brake
- provided you are in first gear or neu- pedal.
tral on a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in position A or M on
an electronic gear control gearbox,
- provided you are in position D or M
on an automatic gearbox.

Do not exit the vehicle while

it is being held in the hill start
assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the
parking brake manually then ensure
that the parking brake warning lamp If a fault in the system occurs, these
(and the warning lamp P in the lever warning lamps come on. Contact a
of the electric parking brake) are on PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work-
fixed (not flashing). shop sto have the system checked.

DR
145
 Operating faults
If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these
tables, place the vehicle in a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.

Situations Consequences

Display of the message "Parking brake - The automatic functions are deactivated.
fault" and of the following warning lamps: - Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.

Display of the message "Parking brake - Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing the
fault" and of the following warning accelerator pedal and releasing the control.
lamps: - Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.

Display of the message "Parking - The automatic functions are deactivated.

brake fault" and of the following warn- - Hill start assist is not available.
ing lamps:
To apply the electric parking brake:
) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
) Pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.
and possibly ) Switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake
warning lamps.
The application is slower than during normal operation.
To release the electric parking brake:
) Switch on the ignition.
) Pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.
If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on
flashing with the ignition on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level
ground and have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

146
 Situations Consequences

Display of the message "Parking

brake control fault - auto parking
brake activated" and of the following
warning lamps:

- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic re-
lease on acceleration functions are available.
- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the emer-
and possibly gency braking are not available.

flashing

Battery fault
- If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as
the traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the two
chocks under the wheels).
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.

DR
147
 HEAD-UP DISPLAY Buttons Displays during operation

System which projects various informa- 1. Head-up display on/off. Once the system has been activated,
tion onto a transparent strip in the field 2. Brightness adjustment. the following information is grouped to-
of vision of the driver so that they do not gether in the head-up display:
have to take their eyes off the road. 3. Display height adjustment.
A. The speed of your vehicle.
This system operates when the engine The strip is activated by pressing one of
the buttons. B. Cruise control/speed limiter information.
is running and the settings are stored
when the ignition is switched off.
C. "Distance alert" information (depending
on version).
DRI

148
Activation/Deactivation Brightness adjustment
We recommend that adjust-
ments are only made using
these buttons when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
When stationary or while driving, no
objects should be placed around the
transparent strip (or on its cover) to
avoid blocking the strip output and
preventing its correct operation.

) With the engine running, press button 1. ) With the engine running, adjust the
The activated/deactivated status when brightness of the information using
the engine was switched off is retained button 2:
when the engine is switched on again. - up to increase the brightness,
- down to decrease the brightness.
Height adjustment In certain extreme weather
conditions (rain and/or snow,
) With the engine running, adjust the bright sunshine, ...) the head-
display to the required height using up display may not be legible or may
button 3: suffer temporary interference.
- up to move the display up, Certain glasses (sunglasses, spec-
- down to move the display down. tacles or polarised lenses) may ham-
per reading of the information.
To clean the transparent strip, which
is made of organic glass, use a clean,
soft cloth (such as a spectacles cloth
or microfibre cloth). Do not use a dry
or abrasive cloth or detergent or sol-
vent products as these could scratch
the strip or damage the anti-reflection
coating.

DR
149
 DISTANCE ALERT* Buttons Displays during operation

Driving aid which informs the driver of

the time interval (in seconds) separat-
ing them from the vehicle in front when
the driving conditions are stable.
It does not detect stationary vehicles
and does not itself take any action on
your vehicle's controls.

1. On/off.
2. Alert value increase (+)/decrease (-).

The information is grouped together in

the head-up display.
Once the system has been activated:
A. The speed of your vehicle is outside
the operating range.
For the safety time to be observed, re- B. Your vehicle is within the operating
fer to the current legislation or highway range but no vehicle has been de-
code recommendations in your country. tected.
The system operates when the speed C. The vehicle in front of you has been
of your vehicle is higher than 45 mph detected.
(70 km/h) and below 90 mph (150 km/h). The current time separating you
It has a programmable visual alert from this vehicle is displayed per-
which remains in the memory when the manently.
ignition is switched off. D. The time between your vehicle and
This system is a driving aid and cannot, the vehicle in front is less than the
in any circumstances, take the place of programmed alert value (it flashes).
the vigilance and responsibility of the
DRI

driver.

* Depending on version.
150
Activation Operating limits
The system switches to standby auto-
matically if the sensor does not detect
the vehicle in front correctly (very dif-
ficult weather conditions, sensor out of
adjustment, ...). A message is displayed
in the multifunction screen.
The vehicle being followed may not be
When the time (in seconds) between detected in certain conditions such as,
your vehicle and the vehicle in front is for example:
less than the programmed time (alert - when turning,
value), a visual alert flashes. - when changing lane,
- when the vehicle in front is either
too far ahead (maximum range of
) Press button 1, the indicator lamp the sensor: 100 m) or stationary (in
comes on. A safety time of 2 seconds a traffic jam, ...),
The system is activated but will only is recommended in normal When the vehicle being followed is
operate from 45 mph (70 km/h). driving conditions (correct much too near (time between the two
traction and speed) to avoid vehicles less than 0.5 seconds), the dis-
Programming the alert value a collision in the event of emergency play remains fixed at 0.5 seconds.
braking.
) Select the alert value required using
button 2, in steps of 0.1 second:
- up to increase: "+", If the indicator lamp in but-
- down to decrease: "-". ton 1 flashes, have the system
Deactivation checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
) Press button 1 to deactivate the sys- or a qualified workshop.
Example with a value of 2 seconds: tem, the indicator lamp goes off.
This system is not an anti-collision radar
and it does not act of the movement of
your vehicle. It provides information but
cannot, in any circumstances, take the
Reactivation place of the vigilance and responsibility
of the driver.
) Press button 1 again to reactivate
the system.
The alert value can be programmed to The last value programmed is retained

DR
between 0.9 second and 2.5 seconds. and the indicator lamp comes on.
The visual alert can be deactivated by
programming a value of 0 second.
151
 SPEED LIMITER Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by
the driver.
When the programmed speed limit is
reached, pressing the accelerator pedal no
longer has any effect unless it is pressed
firmly, which permits temporary exceeding
of the programmed speed.
To return to the programmed speed,
simply slow down to a speed below the
programmed speed by releasing the ac-
celerator.

The controls of this system are grouped

The speed limiter is switched on man- together on stalk A.
ually: it requires a programmed speed 1. Speed limiter mode selection dial
of at least 20 mph (30 km/h). 2. Programmed value decrease button
3. Programmed value increase button
The speed limiter is switched off by 4. Speed limiter on/off button The programmed information is grouped
manual operation of the control. together on the instrument panel screen.
5. Speed limiter on/off indication
6. Speed limiter mode selection indication
The programmed speed remains in the 7. Programmed speed value
memory when the ignition is switched off.

The speed limiter cannot, in any This information also appears

circumstances, replace the need in the head-up display.
to observe speed limits, nor can For more information on the
it replace the need for vigilance and re-
DRI

head-up display, refer to the relevant

sponsibility on the part of the driver. page in this "Driving" section.

152
Programming Return to normal driving
) Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: ) Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the
the speed limiter mode is selected speed limiter mode is deselected.
but is not switched on (OFF). The display returns to the distance
You do not have to switch the speed recorder.
limiter on in order to set the speed.

Operating fault
In the event of a speed limiter malfunc-
) Set the speed value by pressing button 2 or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph tion, the speed is cleared resulting in
(90 km/h)). flashing of the dashes.
You can then change the programmed speed using buttons Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
2 and 3: or a qualified workshop.
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.
) Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4.

) Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4: the dis-

play confirms that it has been switched off (OFF).

On a steep descent or in the

) Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 event of sharp acceleration,
again. the speed limiter will not be
able to prevent the vehicle from ex-
ceeding the programmed speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
Exceeding the programmed speed pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed correctly,
speed will not have any effect unless you press the pedal
firmly past the point of resistance. - do not fit one mat on top of an-
other.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the pro-
grammed speed, which is still displayed, flashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or

DR
unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels
the flashing of the programmed speed.

153
 CRUISE CONTROL Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
System which automatically maintains
the speed of the vehicle at the value
programmed by the driver, without any
action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on
manually: it requires a minimum vehicle
speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) and the en-
gagement of:
- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
- second gear in sequential mode on
the electronic gear control gearbox
or automatic gearbox,
- position A on the electronic gear
control gearbox or D on the auto-
matic gearbox. The controls of this system are grouped
together on stalk A.
1. Cruise control mode selection dial
The cruise control is switched off man- 2. Speed programming/programmed
ually or by pressing the brake or clutch value decrease button
pedal or on triggering of the ESP sys-
tem for safety reasons. 3. Speed programming/programmed
value increase button The programmed information is grouped
4. Cruise control off/resume button together in the instrument panel screen.
It is possible to exceed the programmed 5. Cruise control off/resume indication
speed temporarily by pressing the ac- 6. Cruise control mode selection indi-
celerator pedal. cation
To return to the programmed speed, 7. Programmed speed value
simply release the accelerator pedal.

Switching off the ignition cancels any

programmed speed value. The cruise control cannot, in any This information also appears
circumstances, replace the need in the head-up display.
to observe speed limits, nor can For more information on the
it replace the need for vigilance and re- head-up display, refer to the relevant
sponsibility on the part of the driver. page in this "Driving" section.
DRI

154
Programming Operating fault

) Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" po- In the event of a cruise control malfunc-
sition: the cruise control mode is tion, the speed is cleared resulting in
selected but is not switched on flashing of the dashes.
(OFF). Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
) Set the programmed speed by ac-
celerating to the required speed,
then press button 2 or 3 (e.g.:
70 mph (110 km/h)).

You can then change the programmed speed using buttons

2 and 3:
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- by + or - 5 mph (km/h) = long press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press. When the cruise control is
switched on, be careful if you
) Switch off the cruise control by pressing button 4: the maintain the pressure on one
display confirms that it has been switched off (OFF). of the programmed speed chang-
ing buttons: this may result in a very
rapid change in the speed of your
vehicle.
) Switch the cruise control back on by pressing button 4 Do not use the cruise control on slip-
again. pery roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise con-
trol will not be able to prevent the
Exceeding the programmed speed vehicle from exceeding the pro-
grammed speed.
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed
speed results in flashing of this speed in the screen. To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or
unintentional deceleration of the vehicle, automatically can- - ensure that the mat is positioned
cels the flashing of the speed. correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Return to normal driving
) Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is

DR
deselected. The display returns to the distance recorder.

155
 6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX GEAR EFFICIENCY INDICATOR* Example:
- You are in third gear.
Engaging 5th or 6th gear System which reduces fuel consumption
by advising the driver to change up on
) Move the lever fully to the right to vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox.
engage 5th or 6th gear.

Operation
Engaging reverse gear
The system intervenes only when driv- - You press the accelerator pedal
ing economically. moderately.
Depending on the driving situation and
your vehicle's equipment, the system
may advise you to skip one or more
gears. You can follow this instruc-
tion without engaging the intermediate
gears.
The gear recommended should not
be considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount - The system may suggest that you
of traffic and safety remain determining engage a higher gear, if appropriate.
factors when choosing the best gear.
) Raise the ring under the knob and Therefore, the driver remains responsi-
move the gear lever to the left then ble for deciding whether or not to follow
forwards. the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
Only engage reverse gear
when the vehicle is stationary
with the engine at idle. In the case of driving which makes
particular demands on the perfor- The information appears in the form
mance of the engine (firm pres- of an arrow in the instrument panel
sure on the accelerator pedal, for example, screen.
As a safety precaution and to when overtaking...), the system will not rec-
facilitate starting of the engine: Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
ommend a gear change. this arrow may be accompanied by the
The system never suggests: recommended gear.
- always select neutral, - engaging first gear,
DRI

- press the clutch pedal. - engaging reverse gear, This equipment will become available
during the year.
- engaging a lower gear.
* According to engine.
156
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC Gear lever Steering mounted controls
GEAR CONTROL GEARBOX

Six-speed electronic gear control gear-

box which offers a choice between the
comfort of fully automatic operation or
the pleasure of manual gear changing.
Three driving modes are offered:
- automatic mode for automatic
control of the gears by the gearbox,
- sequential mode for manual changing
of the gears by the driver,
- auto sequential mode to overtake,
for example, remaining in automatic
mode while using the functions of
the sequential mode. R. Reverse +. Change up paddle to the right of the
A Sport function is available in auto- ) With your foot on the brake, move steering wheel.
matic or sequential mode for a more dy- the lever upwards to select this posi- ) Press the back of the "+" steering
namic style of driving. tion. mounted paddle to change up a
N. Neutral. gear.
) With your foot on the brake, select -. Change down paddle to the left of the
this position to start. steering wheel.
A. Automatic mode. ) Press the back of the "-" steering
mounted paddle to change down a
) Move the lever downwards to select gear.
this mode.
M. +/- Sequential mode with manual
changing of the gears.
) Move the lever downwards then to
the left to select this mode, then:
- push the lever forwards to change
up a gear, The steering mounted paddles
- or pull the lever rearwards to cannot be used to select neu-
change down a gear. tral or engage or disengage
reverse gear.
S. Sport function.
) Press this button to activate or de-

DR
activate this function.

157
 Displays in the instrument panel Moving off If position R, A or M is selected, even
with the engine at idle, if the brakes are
) Select position N. released the vehicle moves without any
) Press the brake pedal down fully. action on the accelerator. Never leave
children unsupervised in the vehicle
) Start the engine. when the engine is running. When car-
rying out maintenance on the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the park-
N appears in the instrument ing brake and select position N.
panel screen.

Sequential mode
N flashes in the instrument
panel, accompanied by an au- ) When the vehicle has moved off, se-
dible signal and a message in lect position M to change to sequen-
Gear lever positions the multifunction screen, if the gear tial mode.
N. Neutral lever is not in position N on starting.
Foot on brake flashes in the instru- AUTO disappears and the
R. Reverse gears engaged appear in suc-
ment panel, accompanied by an au-
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Gears in sequential dible signal and a message in the cession in the instrument panel
mode multifunction screen, if the brake screen.
AUTO. This comes on when the automatic pedal is not pressed on starting.
mode is selected. It goes off on The gear change requests are only car-
changing to sequential mode. ried out if the engine speed permits.
S. Sport (Sport function) It is not necessary to release the accel-
) Keep your foot on the brake pedal, erator during gear changes.
move the gear lever to position A or When braking or slowing down, the
M to go forwards, or R to go back- gearbox changes down automatically to
) Place your foot on the wards. allow vehicle to pull away in the correct
brake when this warning ) Take your foot off the brake pedal, gear.
lamp flashes (e.g.: when you can then move off.
starting the engine). ) The parking brake is released automati-
cally, otherwise release it manually.

There is an audible signal when AUTO and 1 or R appear in

reverse gear is engaged. the instrument panel screen.
DRI

158
 Automatic mode "Auto sequential mode"
At very low speed, if reverse
gear is requested, this will only ) Following use of the sequential This mode enables you to overtake, for
be taken into account when mode, select position A to return to example, remaining in automatic mode
the vehicle is immobilised. The Foot the automatic mode. while using the functions of the sequen-
on brake warning lamp may flash in tial mode.
the instrument panel to prompt you
to brake. AUTO and the gear engaged ) Operate the + or - steering mounted
appear in the instrument panel paddle.
At high speed, if reverse gear is re-
quested, the N indicator lamp will screen. The gearbox engages the gear request-
flash and the gearbox will change to ed if the engine speed permits. AUTO is
neutral automatically. To engage a still displayed in the instrument panel.
gear again, return the lever to posi- The gearbox is then operating in auto- After a few moments without any action
tion A or M. active mode, without any action on the on the controls, the gearbox resumes
part of the driver. It continuously selects automatic control of the gears.
the most suitable gear in relation to the
following parameters:
- style of driving,
On sharp acceleration, the - profile of the road.
gearbox will not change up
unless the driver acts on the
gear lever or the steering mounted
paddles.
For optimum acceleration, for
Never select neutral N while the ve- example when overtaking an-
hicle is moving. other vehicle, press the accel-
Only engage reverse gear R when erator pedal firmly past the point of
the vehicle is immobilised with the resistance.
brake pedal pressed.

159
 Sport function Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
) Following selection of the sequential Before switching off the engine, you can With the ignition on, if this
mode or automatic mode, press but- choose to: warning lamp comes on and
ton S to activate the Sport function - move to position N to engage neutral, AUTO flashes, accompanied
which offers you a more dynamic by an audible signal and a
style of driving. - leave the gear engaged; in this message in the multifunction
case, it will not be possible to move screen, this indicates a fault with the
the vehicle. gearbox.
S appears next to the gear en- In both cases, it is essential that you Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
gaged in the instrument panel apply the parking brake to immobilise or a qualified workshop.
screen. the vehicle.

) Press button S again to deactivate

the function.
S is then cleared from the instrument
panel screen.

The gearbox returns to normal When immobilising the vehi- It is essential to press the
mode automatically each time cle, with the engine running, it brake pedal when starting the
the ignition is switched off. is essential to place the gear engine.
lever in neutral N. When parking, is it essential to apply
Before carrying out any work in the the parking brake to immobilise the
engine compartment, check that the vehicle, whatever the circumstances.
gear lever is in neutral N and that
the parking brake is applied.
DRI

160
"PORSCHE TIPTRONIC Gear lever Displays in the instrument panel
SYSTEM" AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
Six speed automatic gearbox which of-
fers a choice between the comfort of
fully automatic operation, enhanced by
sport and snow programmes, or manual
gear changing.
Four driving modes are offered:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the
gearbox,
- sport programme for a more dy-
namic style of driving,
- snow programme to improve driv-
ing when traction is poor, P. Park. When you move the lever in the gate
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, park- to select a position, the corresponding
- manual operation for sequential indicator is displayed in the instrument
changing of the gears by the driver. ing brake on or off.
panel.
- Starting the engine.
P. Park
R. Reverse.
R. Reverse
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle sta-
tionary, engine at idle. N. Neutral
N. Neutral. D. Drive (Automatic driving)
Gear selection gate S. Sport programme
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, park-
ing brake on. 7. Snow programme
- Starting the engine. 1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual
D. Automatic operation. operation
M +/-. Manual operation with sequential -. Invalid value during manual opera-
changing of the six gears. tion
) Press forwards to change up through
the gears.
or
) Press rearwards to change down
through the gears.
1. Gear lever.

DR
2. Button "S" (sport).
3. Button "7" (snow).

161
 Moving off Sport and snow programmes
) With your foot on the brake, select ) Select position D for automatic These two special programmes supple-
position P or N. changing of the six gears. ment the automatic operation in very
) Start the engine. specific conditions of use.
If this procedure is not followed, there
is an audible signal, accompanied by a The gearbox then operates in auto- Sport programme "S"
message in the multifunction screen. adaptive mode, without any intervention ) Press button "S", after starting the
) With the engine running, press the on the part of the driver. It continuously engine.
brake pedal. selects the most suitable gear accord-
ing to the style of driving, the profile of The gearbox automatically favours a
) Release the parking brake, unless it dynamic style of driving.
is programmed to automatic mode. the road and the load in the vehicle.
) Select position R, D or M, For maximum acceleration without
touching the lever, press the accelera- S appears in the instrument
) Gradually release the brake pedal. tor pedal down fully (kick down). The panel.
The vehicle moves off immediately. gearbox changes down automatically
or maintains the gear selected until the
maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down Snow programme "7"
If position N is engaged inad- automatically to provide efficient engine ) Press button "7", after starting the
vertently while driving, allow the braking. engine.
engine to return to idle then en- If you release the accelerator sharply, The gearbox adapts to driving on slip-
gage position D to accelerate. the gearbox will not change to a higher pery roads.
gear for safety reasons.
This programme improves starting and
drive when traction is poor.

When the engine is running at 7 appears in the instrument

idle, with the brakes released, panel.
if position R, D or M is select-
ed, the vehicle moves even without Never select position N while
the accelerator being pressed. the vehicle is moving.
When the engine is running, never Never select positions P or R Return to automatic operation
leave children in the vehicle without unless the vehicle is completely sta-
supervision. tionary. ) At any time, press the button selected
When carrying out maintenance with again to quit the programme engaged
the engine running, apply the parking and return to auto-adaptive mode.
brake and select position P.

162
Manual operation Invalid value during manual Operating fault
operation
) Select position M for sequential
changing of the six gears. This symbol is displayed if a gear When the ignition is on, the
is not engaged correctly (selec- lighting of this warning lamp,
) Push the lever towards the + sign to tor between two positions). accompanied by an audible
change up a gear. signal and a message in the
) Pull the lever towards the - sign to multifunction screen, indicates
change down a gear. a gearbox malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to
back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear.
It is only possible to change from one Stopping the vehicle You may feel a substantial knock when
gear to another if the vehicle speed and changing from P to R and from N to R.
engine speed permit; otherwise, the Before switching off the engine, you This will not cause any damage to the
gearbox will operate temporarily in au- can engage position P or N to place the gearbox.
tomatic mode. gearbox in neutral. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local
In both cases, apply the parking brake speed restrictions permitting.
to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
D disappears and the gears programmed to automatic mode. or a qualified workshop.
engaged appear in succes-
sion in the instrument panel. This warning lamp may also come on if
a door is opened.

If the engine speed is too low or too

high, the gear selected flashes for a few
seconds, then the actual gear engaged If the lever is not in position P, You risk damaging the gear-
is displayed. when the driver's door is opened box:
or approximately 45 seconds af-
ter the ignition is switched off, there is an - if you press the accelerator and
audible signal and a message appears. brake pedals at the same time,
It is possible to change from position D
(automatic) to position M (manual) at ) Return the lever to position P; the - if you force the lever from posi-
any time. audible signal stops and the mes- tion P to another position when
sage disappears. the battery is flat.
When the vehicle is stationary or mov-
ing very slowly, the gearbox selects To reduce fuel consumption when
gear M1 automatically. stationary for long periods with the
engine running (traffic jam...), posi-
The sport and snow programmes do not tion the gear lever at N and apply
operate in manual mode. the parking brake, unless it is pro-
grammed in automatic mode.

DR
163
 STOP & START Special cases: STOP mode not
For your comfort, during park- available
The Stop & Start system puts the engine ing maoeuvres, STOP mode
is not available for a few sec- STOP mode is not invoked when:
temporarily into standby - STOP mode -
during stops in the traffic (red lights, onds after coming out of reverse - the driver's door is open,
traffic jams, or other...). The engine re- gear. - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
starts automatically - START mode - as STOP mode does not affect the func- tened,
soon as you want to move off. The re- tionality of the vehicle, such as for - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
start takes place instantly, quickly and example, braking, power steering... (10 km/h) since the last engine start
silently. using the key,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start - the electric parking brake is applied
system reduces fuel consumption and or being applied,
exhaust emissions as well as the noise
level when stationary. - the engine is needed to maintain a
Never refuel with the engine in comfortable temperature in the pas-
STOP mode; you must switch senger compartment,
off the ignition with the key. - demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
Operation engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine
is needed to assure control of a system.
Going into engine STOP mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel and In this case, the "ECO" warning
the engine goes into standby: lamp flashes for a few seconds
then goes off.
- with the electronic gearbox system,
at speeds below 4 mph (6 km/h), press This operation is perfectly normal.
the brake pedal or put the gear lever in
position N.

If your vehicle is fitted with the system,

a time counter calculates the sum of the
periods in STOP mode during a journey.
It rests itself to zero every time the igni-
tion is switched on with the key.
DRI

164
Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked Deactivation
automatically
The "ECO" warning lamp goes START mode is invoked automatically
off and the engine starts with the when:
electronic gearbox system: - the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fas-
- gear lever in position A or M, release tened,
the brake pedal, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds
- or gear lever in position N and the 7 mph (11 km/h) with the electronic
brake pedal released, move the gearbox system,
gear lever to position A or M, - the electric parking brake is being
- or engage reverse gear. applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine
is needed for control of a system.
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch
to deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the switch warn-
In this case the "ECO" warning ing lamp coming on accompanied by a
lamp flashes for a few seconds, message in the screen.
then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

If the system has been deacti-

vated in STOP mode, the en-
gine restarts immediately.

DR
165
 Reactivation Operating fault Maintenance

Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.

Before doing anything under
The system is active again; this is the bonnet, deactivate the
confirmed by the switch warning lamp Stop & Start system to avoid
going off and a message in the screen. any risk of injury resulting from auto-
matic operation of START mode.

This system requires a 12 V battery

The system is reactivated au- with a special specification and technol-
tomatically at every new start ogy (reference numbers available from
using the key. PEUGEOT dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT
introduces the risk of malfunction of the
In the event of a fault with the system, system.
the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp To charge the battery, use a 12 V char-
flashes then comes on continuously. ger and observe the polarity.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,
the vehicle may stall. It is then neces-
sary to switch off the ignition and start
the engine again using the key.

The Stop & Start system

makes use of advanced tech-
nology. For any work on the
system go to a qualified workshop
with the skills and equipment re-
quired, which a PEUGEOT dealer is
able to provide.

166
VISUAL AND AUDIBLE FRONT
AND/OR REAR PARKING
SENSORS

The parking sensors are switched on: The proximity information is indicated by:
- by engaging reverse gear, - an audible signal which becomes
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in more rapid as the vehicle approach-
forward gear. es the obstacle,
System consisting of four proximity sen- This is accompanied by an audible sig- - a graphic in the multifunction screen,
sors, installed in the front and/or rear nal and display of the vehicle in the mul- with blocks which move closer to the
bumper. tifunction screen. vehicle.
It detects any obstacle (person, vehicle, The obstacle is located in relation to the
tree, barrier...) located behind the vehi- emission of the audible signal by the
cle, however, it will not be able to detect speakers; front or rear and right or left.
obstacles located immediately below When the distance between the vehicle
the bumper. and the obstacle is less than approxi-
mately thirty centimetres, the audible
signal becomes continuous and/or the
"Danger" symbol appears, depending
on the multifunction screen version.

An object, such as a stake, a

roadworks cone or any other
similar object may be detected
at the start of the manoeuvre but may
no longer be detected when the ve-
hicle moves nearer to it.

DR
167
 The parking sensors are switched off: Deactivation Operating fault
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph If an operating fault occurs,
(10 km/h) in forward gear, this warning lamp is displayed
in the instrument panel and/
- when the vehicle has been station- or a message appears in
ary for more than three seconds in the multifunction screen, ac-
forward gear. companied by an audible signal (short
beep), when reverse gear is engaged.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
fied workshop.

The parking sensor system In bad weather or in winter, en-

cannot, in any circumstances, sure that the sensors are not
replace the need for vigilance covered with mud, ice or snow.
and responsibility on the part When reverse gear is engaged, an
of the driver. ) Press button A, the warning lamp audible signal (long beep) indicates
comes on, the system is fully deacti- that the sensors may be dirty.
vated. When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain sources of noise
The system will be deacti- (motorcycles, lorries, pneumatic
vated automatically when a drills, ...) may trigger the parking sen-
trailer is being towed or when sor audible signals.
a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fit-
ted with a towbar or bicycle carrier
recommended by PEUGEOT).

Reactivation
) Press button A again, the warning
lamp switches off, the system is re-
activated.
DRI

168
PARKING SPACE SENSORS Displays in the instrument panel

After measuring the parking space avail- The parking space sensor
able between two vehicles or obstacles, function warning lamp can
this system gives you information on: have three different states:
- the possibility of fitting into a free
space, depending on the dimen-
sions of your vehicle and the dis- - off: the function is not selected,
tances needed for manoeuvring, - on fixed: the function is selected
- the level of difficulty of the manoeu- but the conditions for measurement
vre to be performed. are not yet met (direction indicator
not operating, speed too high) or the
measurement phase has ended,
- flashing: measurement is in prog-
ress or the message is being dis- You can activate the "parking space
played. sensor" function by pressing button A.
The fixed illumination of the warning
lamp indicates that the function is se-
lected.

The system does not measure spaces

which are clearly much smaller or larger
than the size of the vehicle.

DR
169
 Operation The function displays the following The function deactivates itself automati-
types of message: cally:
You have identified a parking space: - when you engage reverse gear,
) Press button A to activate the func- Parking possible - when you switch off the ignition,
tion.
- five minutes after activation of the
) Activate the direction indicator on function or after the last measure-
the side where the space is to be ment operation,
measured.
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the
) During the measuring, go forward threshold of 45 mph (approximately
the length of the space, at a speed 70 km/h) for one minute.
less than 12 mph (approximately
20 km/h), to prepare for your ma-
noeuvre.
The system then measures the size If the lateral distance between
of the space. Parking difficult your vehicle and the parking
) The system informs you of the level space is too great, the system
of difficulty of the manoeuvre via a may not operate.
message in the multifunction screen
accompanied by an audible signal.

- The function remains avail-

able after each measure-
ment and so can measure
Parking not advised a number of places succes-
sively.
- In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered
by dirt, or by ice or snow.
- The parking space sensor func-
tion deactivates the front parking
sensors during the space mea-
suring phase when you are in for-
ward gear.
If there is a malfunction, have the sys-
tem checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
DRI

170
Innovation at the service of performance
The TOTAL Research and Development teams
develop lubricants for PEUGEOT which satisfy
the requirements of the latest technical innova-
tions incorporated in PEUGEOT vehicles.
This ensures that you obtain the best perfor-
mance and the maximum engine life.

Reduced exhaust emissions

TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise
the efficiency of engines and the protection
of the emissions post-treatment systems. It
is crucial to observe the servicing recom-
mendations made by PEUGEOT to ensure
correct operation.

CHECKS
RECOMMENDS

171
 BONNET

Opening
) Open the front left door.
) Pull the interior bonnet release le-
ver A, located at the bottom of the The location of the interior
door aperture. bonnet release lever prevents
opening of the bonnet while
the front left door is closed.
Do not open the bonnet in high
winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
) Push the exterior safety catch B to stay with care (risk of burns).
the left and raise the bonnet.

Before doing anything un-

der the bonnet, switch off the
Stop & Start system to avoid
any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.

) Unclip the stay C from its housing. Closing

) Fix the stay in the notch to hold the
bonnet open. ) Take the stay out of the support
notch.
) Clip the stay in its housing.
CHECKS

) Lower the bonnet and release it at

the end of its travel.
) Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.

172
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL 1.6 litre Turbo HDI engine 2 litre Turbo HDI engine
(DIESEL)
) Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres ) Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres
of diesel. of Diesel.
) Open the bonnet. ) Open the bonnet.
) If necessary, unclip the styling cover ) Unclip the style cover for access to
for access to the priming pump. the priming pump.
) Squeeze and release the priming ) Slacken the bleed screw.
pump repeatedly until resistance is ) Squeeze and release the priming
felt (there may be resistance at the pump repeatedly until fuel appears
first press). in the transparent pipe with the
) Operate the starter until the engine green connector.
starts (if the engine does not start at ) Retighten the bleed screw.
the first attempt, wait around 15 sec-
onds before trying again). ) Operate the starter until the engine
starts.
) If the engine does not start after a
few attempts, operate the priming ) Put the style cover back in position
On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the pump again then start the engine. and clip it in place.
fuel system must be primed if you run ) Close the bonnet.
out of fuel; refer to the engine compart- ) Clip the styling cover back in place.
ment view on the "Diesel engine" page. ) Close the bonnet.
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with
a misfuel prevention device, refer to the
section "Access - § Misfuel prevention
(Diesel)".

If the engine does not start first

time, don't keep trying. Start

CHECKS
the procedure again from the
beginning.

173
 PETROL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.

1. Power steering reservoir. 4. Brake fluid reservoir. 7. Air filter.

2. Screenwash and headlamp wash 5. Battery/Fuses. 8. Engine oil dipstick.
CHECKS

reservoir.
6. Fusebox. 9. Engine oil filler cap.
3. Coolant reservoir.

174
DIESEL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and
for priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir. 4. Brake fluid reservoir. 8. Engine oil dipstick.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash 5. Battery/Fuses. 9. Engine oil filler cap.

CHECKS
reservoir.
6. Fusebox. 10. Priming pump*.
3. Coolant reservoir.
7. Air filter. 11. Bleed screw*.

* According to engine.
175
 CHECKING LEVELS Engine oil change Coolant level
Refer to the servicing booklet for details
Check all of these levels regularly and of the interval for this operation.
top them up if necessary, unless other- The coolant level should be
wise indicated. In order to maintain the reliability of the close to the "MAX" mark but
engine and emission control system, should never exceed it.
If a level drops significantly, have the the use of additives in the engine oil is
corresponding system checked by a prohibited.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work- When the engine is warm, the temperature
shop. of the coolant is regulated by the fan. This
Oil specification can operate with the ignition off.
On vehicles which are fitted with a par-
When working under the bon- The oil must be the correct grade for ticle emission filter, the fan may operate
net, take care, as certain areas your engine and conform to the manu- after the vehicle has been switched off,
of the engine may be extremely facturer's recommendations. even if the engine is cold.
hot (risk of burns). In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
Brake fluid level switching off the engine before carrying
out any work.
Oil level The brake fluid level should be To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the
The check is carried out either close to the "MAX" mark. If it is cap by two turns to allow the pressure to
when the ignition is switched on not, check the brake pad wear. drop. When the pressure has dropped, re-
using the oil level indicator on move the cap and top up the level.
the instrument panel, or using
the dipstick.
Changing the fluid
This manual check will only be correct if the Changing the coolant
vehicle is on level ground and the engine Refer to the servicing booklet for details
has been off for more than 30 minutes. of the interval for this operation. The coolant does not have to be changed.
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil level in- Fluid specification
dicator in the instrument panel will only be Fluid specification The coolant must conform to the manu-
valid 30 minutes after topping up. facturer's recommendations.
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations and
meet the DOT4 standard. Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
CHECKS

It is normal to top up the oil level In the case of vehicles fitted

between services. PEUGEOT Power steering fluid level with headlamp washers, the
recommends that you check the low fluid level is indicated by an
oil level and top up if necessary every The power steering fluid level audible signal and a message
3 000 miles (5 000 kilometres). should be close to the "MAX" in the instrument panel screen.
mark. Unscrew the cap, with the Top up the reservoir when you stop the
engine cold, to check the level. vehicle.
176
Fluid specification CHECKS Air filter
For optimum cleaning and to avoid Unless otherwise indicated, check these Refer to the servicing booklet
freezing, this fluid must not be topped components in accordance with the servic- for details of the replacement
up with or replaced with plain water. ing booklet and according to your engine. intervals for these components.
Otherwise, have them checked by a Depending on the environment
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work- (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and
Diesel additive level (Diesel engine shop. the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving),
replace them twice as often if neces-
with particle emission filter) sary (refer to the "Engines" paragraph).
Battery
The additive reservoir low level is indicated The battery does not require any
by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, maintenance.
accompanied by an audible warning and a
message in the multifunction screen. However, check that the terminals
are clean and correctly tightened,
particularly in summer and winter. Oil filter
Topping up When carrying out work on the battery, Replace the oil filter each time
refer to the "Practical information" sec- the engine oil is changed.
This additive must be topped up by a tion for details of the precautions to be
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified work- taken before disconnecting the battery Refer to the servicing booklet
shop without delay. and following its reconnection. for details of the replacement
interval for this component.

Used products

Avoid prolonged contact of

used oil or fluids with the skin.

Most of these fluids are harmful to

health or indeed very corrosive. The presence of this label, in
particular with the Stop & Start
system, indicates the use of a
specific 12 V lead-acid battery
with special technology and
Do not discard used oil or fluids specification, for which the involve-

CHECKS
into sewers or onto the ground. ment of a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop is required when
Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer replacing or disconnecting the bat-
or a qualified workshop (France) or tery.
to an authorised waste disposal site. Failure to observe this recommendation
may shorten the life of the battery.

177
 Dust filter/Anti-odour filter Manual gearbox Brake pads
(activated carbon)
Your vehicle is fitted with a filter which The gearbox does not re- Brake wear depends on the
traps certain dust and limits odours in quire any maintenance (no oil style of driving, particularly in
the ventilation and air conditioning. change). the case of vehicles used in
Refer to the servicing booklet for town, over short distances. It
Refer to the Warranty and Maintenance may be necessary to have the
Record for its replacement interval. the details of the level checking
interval for this component. condition of the brakes checked, even
Do not hesitate to change it if you notice between vehicle services.
unpleasant odours, contact a PEUGEOT Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a
dealer. drop in the brake fluid level indicates
A clogged passenger compartment filter 6-speed electronic that the brake pads are worn.
may reduce the performance of the air gearbox system
conditioning system and produce un-
pleasant odours. The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no oil
change). Brake disc wear
Refer to the servicing booklet
for details of the checking in- For information on checking
terval for this component. brake disc wear, contact a
Particle emission filter (Diesel) PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
fied workshop.
Maintenance of the particle emission fil- Automatic gearbox
ter must be carried out by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no oil Electric parking brake
On a new vehicle, the first few change).
particle emissions filter regenera- Refer to the servicing booklet
tions may be accompanied by a This system does not require any
for details of the level checking routine servicing. However, in
"burning" smell, which is perfectly nor- interval for this component.
mal. Following prolonged operation of the event of a problem, have the
the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, system checked by a PEUGEOT
you may, in exceptional circumstances, dealer or a qualified workshop.
CHECKS

notice water vapour from the exhaust For more information, see "Driving -
on acceleration. This does not affect the Electric parking brake - § Operating
performance of the vehicle or the envi- faults".
ronment.

178
TEMPORARY PUNCTURE List of tools Other accessories
REPAIR KIT
(5 SEAT VERSION)*
Complete system consisting of a com-
pressor and a sealant cartridge which
permits temporary repair of a tyre so
that you can drive to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures
which could affect the tyre, located on
the tyre tread or shoulder. 4. Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing

the vehicle".

5. Electric parking brake emergency

Access to the kit release control.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Refer to "Electric parking brake"
in the "Driving" section.

All of these tools are specific to your

vehicle. Do not use them for other
purposes.
1. 12 V compressor.
Contains a sealant cartridge for
the temporary repair of a tyre and
can be used to adjust the tyre
pressures.
2. Two chocks to chock the vehicle.
3. Socket for security bolts (located
The kit is located in the boot under the in the glove box*).
concertina board.
For adapting the wheelbrace to
Tools 4 and 5 are located in the boot the special security bolts.
interior trim, on the left-hand side.

* Depending on destination country.

179
 Description of the kit

A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. F. Sealant cartridge.

B. On "I"/off "O" switch. G. White pipe with cap for repair.
C. Deflation button. H. Black pipe for inflation.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

D. Pressure gauge (in bar or p.s.i.). I. Speed limit sticker.

E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for ac-
cessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...

The speed limit sticker I must

be affixed to the vehicle's
steering wheel to remind you
that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre re-
paired using this type of kit.

180
Repair procedure
1. Sealing

) Switch off the ignition. ) Uncoil the white pipe G fully. ) Connect the compressor's electric
) Turn the selector A to the ) Unscrew the cap from the white plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
"sealant" position. pipe. ) Start the vehicle and leave the en-
) Check that the switch B is in ) Connect the white pipe to the valve gine running.
position "O". of the tyre to be repaired.

Avoid removing any foreign Take care, this product is

bodies which have penetrated harmful (e.g. ethylene-glycol,
into the tyre. colophony...) if swallowed and
causes irritation to the eyes.
Keep it out of reach of children.

181
 ) Switch on the compressor by mov- ) Remove the kit and screw the cap
ing the switch B to position "I" until back on the white pipe.
the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars. Take care to avoid staining your ve-
The sealant is injected into the tyre hicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit
under pressure; do not disconnect to hand.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

the pipe from the valve during this ) Drive immediately for approximate-
operation (risk of splashing). ly three miles (five kilometres), at
reduced speed (between 15 and
35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug
the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the tyre
Do not start the compressor pressure using the kit.
before connecting the white
pipe to the tyre valve: the
sealant product would be expelled
through the pipe.

Tyre under-inflation
If after around 5 to 7 minutes detection
the pressure is not attained,
this indicates that the tyre is If the vehicle is fitted with tyre
not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT under-inflation detection, the under-
dealer or a qualified workshop for as- inflation warning lamp will remain on af-
sistance. ter the wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

182
2. INFLATION

) Turn the selector A to the ) Connect the compressor's electric A loss of pressure indicates that the
"air" position. plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket. puncture has not been fully plugged;
) Uncoil the black pipe H fully. ) Start the vehicle again and leave the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qual-
ified workshop for assistance.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
) Connect the black pipe to engine running.
the valve of the wheel. ) Adjust the pressure using the com- ) Remove and stow the kit.
pressor (to inflate: switch B in po- ) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
sition "I"; to deflate: switch B in [80 km/h] max) limiting the distance
position "O" and press button C), in travelled to approximately 120 miles
accordance with the vehicle's tyre (200 km).
pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).

) Visit a PEUGEOT dealer

or a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.
You must inform the technician that
you have used this kit. After inspec-
tion, the technician will inform you
whether the tyre can be repaired or
must be replaced.

183
 Removing the cartridge Checking tyre pressures/
inflating accessories
You can also use the compressor, with-
out injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your
tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bi-
cycle tyres...).

) Connect the compressor's electri-

) Stow the black pipe. cal connector to the vehicle's 12 V
socket.
) Detach the angled base from the
white pipe. ) Start the vehicle and let the engine
run.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

) Support the compressor vertically.

) Adjust the pressure using the com-
) Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom. pressor (to inflate: switch B in po-
sition "I"; to deflate: switch B in
position "O" and press button C),
according to the vehicle's tyre pres-
sure label or the accessory's pres-
Beware of discharges of fluid. sure label.
The expiry date of the fluid is ) Turn the selector A to the ) Remove the kit then stow it.
indicated on the cartridge. "Air" position.
The sealant cartridge is designed for ) Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
single use; even if only partly used, it ) Connect the black pipe to
must be replaced. the valve of the wheel or accessory.
After use, do not discard the car- If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
tridge into the environment, take it to supplied with the kit first.
an authorised waste disposal site or
a PEUGEOT dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from PEUGEOT
dealers or from a qualified workshop.

184
TEMPORARY PUNCTURE Using the kit
REPAIR KIT ) Switch off the ignition.
(7 SEAT VERSION)* ) Tick the wheel to be repaired on the
speed limitation sticker enclosed
then affix the sticker to the vehicle's
Complete system consisting of a com- steering wheel to remind you that a
pressor and a bottle of sealant which wheel is in temporary use.
permits temporary repair of the tyre ) Clip the bottle 1 on the compressor 2.
so that you can drive to the nearest ga-
rage.

) Check that the switch A is tilted to

position "0".
) Connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to
the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
) Unwind the pipe of the compressor 2
fully, then connect it to the bottle.

The kit is located in the boot, under the

left hand seat in the 3rd row.

) Connect the compressor's electric

This kit is available from a plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
fied workshop. ) Start the vehicle and leave the en-
gine running.
It is designed to repair holes of a max-
imum diameter of 6 mm, only where
located on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated the tyre.

* According to country of sale.

185
 ) Switch on the compressor by tilting
the switch A to position "1" until the If this pressure has not been
tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars. reached after approximate-
ly five to ten minutes, the
tyre cannot be repaired; contact a
PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop
to have your vehicle repaired.

) Remove the compressor and store

the bottle in the plastic bag, supplied
in the kit, to avoid staining your ve-
hicle with traces of fluid.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

) Drive immediately for approximate-

ly two miles (three kilometres), at
reduced speed (between 10 and
35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug
the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the
pressure.

) Connect the compressor pipe di-

rectly to the valve of the repaired
wheel.

186
) Connect the compressor's electric
plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket Take care, the bottle of fluid
again. contains ethylene-glycol. This
product is harmful if swallowed
) Start the vehicle again and leave the and causes irritation to the eyes.
engine running. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicat-
ed on the base of the bottle.
The bottle is designed for a single
use; even if only partly used, it must
be replaced.
After use, do not discard the bottle
into the environment, take it to a
PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised
waste disposal site.
) Adjust the pressure using the
compressor (to inflate: switch A in Do not forget to obtain a new bottle
position "1"; to deflate: switch A in of sealant product, available from
position "0" and press button B), in a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
accordance with the vehicle's tyre workshop.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
pressure label (located on the door
aperture on the driver's side), then
remember to check that the leak is
plugged correctly (no further loss of
pressure after several miles [kilome-
tres]).
) Remove the compressor, then store If the vehicle is fitted with tyre
the whole kit. under-inflation detection, the
tyre under-inflation warning
) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph lamp will remain on after the wheel
[80 km/h] max) for no more than ap- has been repaired until the system is
proximately 125 miles (200 km). reinitialised by a PEUGEOT dealer
) Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali- or a qualified workshop.
fied workshop as soon as possible
to have the tyre repaired or replaced
by a technician.

187
 CHANGING A WHEEL*
List of tools* 1. Wheelbrace.
Procedure for changing a faulty wheel For removing the wheel trim and
for the spare wheel using the tools pro- the wheel fixing bolts.
vided with the vehicle. 2. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
3. "Bolt cover" tool (according to
Access to the tools equipment).
For removing the bolt protectors
(covers) on alloy wheels.
4. Centring guide.
For refitting an alloy wheel to the
hub.
5. Socket for the security bolts (lo-
cated in the glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to
the special security bolts.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

6. Two chocks to immobilise the vehicle.

7. Wheelbrace extension.
For unscrewing/tightening the
spare wheel carrier drive.
The tools 2 to 4 are installed in a box,
in the middle of the spare wheel, placed
underneath the vehicle. All of these tools are specific to your
The tools 1 and 6 to 9 are installed un- vehicle. Do not use them for other
der the concertina boards, in the boot purposes.
inner trim.
To gain access to them:
) open the boot,
) raise the concertina boards.

* Depending on destination country.

188
Other accessories Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel,
detach the trim first using the
wheelbrace 1 pulling at the valve
passage hole.
When refitting the wheel, refit the
trim starting by placing its notch facing
the valve and press around its edge
with the palm of your hand.
8. Removable towing eye.

Refer to the paragraph "Towing

the vehicle".

9. Electric parking brake emergency

release control.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Refer to "Electric parking
brake" in the "Driving" section.

189
 Access to the spare wheel* Taking out the wheel
) Raise the concertina board to reveal
the spare wheel carrier drive nut.
) Turn this drive nut fully clockwise, us-
ing the wheelbrace 1 and the exten-
sion 7, to unwind the carrier cable.

) Detach the wheel/box assembly

from the rear of the vehicle.
The spare wheel is supported by a ) Remove the hook with its connection
cable-driven carrier underneath the ve- plate to release the wheel/box as-
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

hicle. sembly, as shown in the illustration.

) Pull out the wheel to gain access to

the box.
) Slide the box cover to the centre
and remove it to gain access to the
other tools.

* Depending on destination country.

 Putting the wheel back in place
) Store the tools used in the box and
close the cover.
) Position the box on the ground and
centre the spare wheel on it.
) Pass the hook with its connection
plate into the wheel then the box, as
illustrated.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
) Raise the wheel/box assembly under-
Tyre under-inflation neath the vehicle by turning the car-
detection rier drive nut anticlockwise using the
The spare wheel is not fitted wheelbrace 1 and the extension 7.
with a sensor. The punctured wheel ) Tighten fully and check that the
must be repaired by a PEUGEOT wheel is horizontally flush against
dealer or a qualified workshop. the floor.

191
 Removing a wheel List of operations
) Remove the bolt cover from each of
the bolts using the tool 3 (according
to equipment).
) Fit the security socket 5 on the
wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security
bolt (if your vehicle has them).
) Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.

Parking the vehicle ) Place the jack 2 in contact with one

of the two front A or rear B locations
Immobilise the vehicle where provided on the underbody, which-
it does not block traffic: the ever is closest to the wheel to be
ground must be level, stable and
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

changed.
non-slippery ground.
) Extend the jack 2 until its base plate
Apply the parking brake unless it is in contact with the ground. Ensure
has been programmed to automatic that the centreline of the jack base
mode, switch off the ignition and en- plate is directly below the location A
gage first gear* to lock the wheels. or B used.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the P warning lamp on the park-
ing brake control come on.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be changed. ) Raise the vehicle until there is suf-
ficient space between the wheel and
The occupants must get out of the ve- the ground to admit the spare (not
hicle and wait where they are safe. punctured) wheel easily.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised ) Remove the bolts and store them in
using a jack; use an axle stand. a clean place.
) Remove the wheel.

* position R for the electronic gear

control gearbox; P for the automatic
gearbox.

192
Fitting a wheel List of operations
) Put the wheel in place on the hub
using the centring guide 4.
) Screw in the bolts by hand to the
stop.
) Using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with
the security socket 5, pre-tighten
the security bolt (if your vehicle has
them).
) Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.

) Lower the vehicle fully.

) Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
Fitting the "space-saver"
spare wheel

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
If your vehicle is fitted with al-
loy wheels, when tightening the bolts
on fitting it is normal to notice that the
washers do not come into contact
with the "space-saver" spare wheel.
The wheel is secured by the conical
contact of each bolt.

After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the boot ) Using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with
correctly, first remove the central cover. the security socket 5, tighten the
security bolt (if your vehicle has
When using the "space-saver" type spare them).
wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
) Tighten the other bolts using the
Have the tightening of the bolts and wheelbrace 1 only.
the pressure of the spare wheel
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a ) Refit the bolt covers to each of the
qualified workshop without delay. bolts (according to equipment).
Have the punctured wheel repaired ) Store the tools in the box.
and replace it on the vehicle as soon
as possible.

193
 CHANGING A BULB Model with xenon and directional
headlamps The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a
Front lamps protective coating:
Model with halogen headlamps ) do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
) use a sponge and soapy water,
) when using a high pressure wash-
er on persistent marks, do not
keep the lance directed towards
the lamps or their edges for too
long, so as not to damage their
protective coating and seals.

) Do not touch the bulb directly with

PRACTICAL INFORMATION

your fingers, use lint-free cloths.

1. Direction indicators Changing a bulb should only be
(HP24 amber-24W). done after the headlamp has been
switched off for a few minutes (risk of
2. Dipped/main beam directional serious burns).
1. Direction indicators headlamps (D1S-35W).
It is imperative to use only anti-ultra-
(HP24 amber-24W). 3. Daytime running lamps/ violet (UV) type bulbs in order not to
2. Dipped beam headlamps sidelamps (P21/5W). damage the headlamp.
(H7-55W). 4. Foglamps (PS24-24W). Always replace a failed bulb with a
3. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). new bulb with the same type and
4. Daytime running lamps specification.
(HP24-24W).
5. Foglamps (PS24-24W).
6. Sidelamps (W5-5W).
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must
be replaced by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.

194
Changing direction indicator and Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs Changing main beam headlamp and
daytime running lamp bulbs (models (models with halogen headlamps) sidelamp bulbs
with halogen headlamps)

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali- ) Remove the protective plastic cover ) Remove the protective plastic cover
fied workshop. by pulling on the tab. by pulling on the tab.
) Disconnect the bulb connector. ) Disconnect the bulb connector.
) Extract the bulb by pulling and ) Remove the bulb by pulling and
change it. change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in re- To refit, carry out these operations in re-
verse order. verse order.

195
 Changing integrated direction Changing foglamp bulbs
Changing dipped beam indicator side repeaters
and main beam headlamp
bulbs (models with xenon
headlamps)
D1S xenon bulbs must be changed
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as there is a risk of elec-
trocution.
It is recommended that the D1S bulbs
are changed at the same time when
one of them fails.

Changing sidelamp and daytime ) Insert a screwdriver towards the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
running lamp bulbs (models with centre of the repeater between the fied workshop.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

xenon headlamps) repeater and the base of the mirror.

) Remove the protective plastic cover ) Tilt the screwdriver to extract the re-
by pulling on the tab. peater and remove it.
) Disconnect the bulb connector. ) Disconnect the repeater connector.
) Remove the bulb by pulling and To refit, carry out these operations in re-
change it. verse order.
To refit, carry out these operations in re- Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
verse order. fied workshop to obtain replacement
repeaters.

Changing direction You can also contact a

indicator bulbs PEUGEOT dealer or a quali-
fied workshop to have these
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a bulbs changed.
qualified workshop.

196
Rear lamps Changing brake lamp and direction
indicator bulbs

) Remove the two lamp unit fixing

nuts.
) Pull the lamp rearwards (a position-
ing lug retains the lamp).
) Disconnect the lamp connector.

) Press the four tabs and remove the

bulb holder.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
1. Direction indicators
(PY21W-21W).
2. Brake lamps
(P21W-21W).
3. Sidelamps
(LEDs).
4. Reversing lamp
(P21W). ) Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
5. Foglamp change it.
(P21W). To refit, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
 Changing sidelamps (LEDs) Changing the third brake lamp bulb Changing the number plate lamp
bulbs (W5-5W)

For the replacement of this type of LED ) Open the boot and remove the upper ) Insert a thin screwdriver into one of
lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a seal. the outer holes of the lens.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

qualified workshop. ) Unscrew the two nuts. ) Push it outwards to unclip.

) Press the threaded pins while sup- ) Remove the lens.
Changing foglamp or reversing porting the lamp from the outside. ) Pull the bulb out and change it.
lamp bulbs ) Disconnect the connector and re-
move the screenwash pipe.

) Reach under the bumper.

) Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and ) Press the pairs of clips A then B
change it. then C to detach and gain access to
the bulb holder.
198
CHANGING A FUSE Changing a fuse
Installing electrical
Procedure for replacing a failed fuse Before changing a fuse, the cause of accessories
with a new fuse to rectify a failure of the the failure must be identified and recti- Your vehicle's electrical sys-
corresponding function. fied. tem is designed to operate with stan-
) Identify the failed fuse by checking dard or optional equipment.
the condition of its filament. Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.

PEUGEOT will not accept re-

sponsibility for the cost incurred
Good Failed in repairing your vehicle or for

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
rectifying malfunctions resulting from the
) Use the special tweezer to extract installation of accessories not supplied
the fuse from its housing. and not recommended by PEUGEOT
and not installed in accordance with
) Always replace the failed fuse with a its instructions, in particular when the
Access to the tools fuse of the same rating. combined consumption of all of the ad-
The fuse extraction tweezer is fitted ) Check that the number marked on ditional equipment connected exceeds
to the back of the dashboard fusebox the fusebox, the rating marked on 10 milliamperes.
cover. the fuse and the following tables all
To gain access to it: agree.
) remove the cover completely,
) remove the tweezer.

199
 Dashboard fuses Fuse tables
The fusebox is placed in the lower dash- Fuse Rating
board (left-hand side). Functions
N° (A)

F1 15 Rear wiper.

F2 - Not used.

F3 5 Airbag control unit.

Electrochromatic rear view mirror, air conditioning,

F4 10
switching and protection unit, rear multimedia.

F5 30 Front one-touch electric windows.

F6 30 Rear one-touch electric windows.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION

Front and rear courtesy lamps, map reading lamps,

rear reading lamps, sun visor lighting, glove box
F7 5 lighting, centre armrest lighting, boot 12 V relay
control.

200
Access to the fuses
Fuse Rating
) refer to the paragraph "Access to Functions
the tools". N° (A)
Audio system, audio/telephone, CD changer,
multifunction screen, tyre under-inflation detection,
F8 20 alarm siren, alarm control unit, telematic unit, service
module (with Peugeot Connect Media Navigation
(NG4 3D)).

F9 30 Front 12 V socket, cigarette lighter, rear 12 V socket.

F10 15 Steering mounted controls.

F11 15 Low current ignition switch.

Trailer presence, rain/brightness sensor, supply
F12 15 for fuses F32, F34, F35.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
F13 5 Engine fusebox, airbag control unit.
Instrument panel, instrument panel screen,
F14 15 supply for fuse F33.
F15 30 Locking and deadlocking.

F17 40 Rear screen demist/defrost, supply for fuse F30.

SH - PARC shunt.

201
 Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)

F29 - Not used

F30 5 Heated door mirrors.

F31 30 Boot 12 V socket.

F32 5 Electronic gear control gearbox gear lever.

F33 10 Head-up display, Bluetooth system, air conditioning.

F34 5 Seat belt warning lamps display.

F35 10 Parking sensors, Hi-Fi amplifier authorisation.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION

F36 10 Trailer fusebox control unit, driver's door control pad.

F37 20 Hi-Fi amplifier.

F38 30 Driver's electric seat.

F39 20 Panoramic sunroof blind.

F40 - Not used.

202
Engine compartment fuses Fuse table
The fusebox is placed in the engine Fuse Rating
compartment near the battery (left-hand Functions
side). N° (A)

Engine management unit supply, injection pump

F1 20 and EGR electrovalves (2 litre HDI), injectors
(2 litre HDI).

F2 15 Horn.

F3 10 Front/rear screenwash.

F4 10 Daytime running lamps.

Canister purge electrovalves, turbine discharge

and Turbo pressure regulation electrovalves
F5 15 (1.6 l THP 16V), oil vapour heater (1.6 l THP 16V),

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
diesel heater (1.6 l HDI 16V).
Access to the fuses Diagnostic socket, directional headlamps, particle
) Unclip the cover. emission filter pump (Diesel), Distance alert,
F6 10
) Change the fuse (see correspond- engine coolant level detector, mirror adjustment
ing paragraph). control.
) When you have finished, close the
cover carefully to ensure correct Power steering control unit, automatic gearbox,
sealing of the fusebox. F7 10 directional headlamps height adjustment motor.

F8 20 Starter motor control.

F9 10 Clutch and brake pedal switches.

Engine management unit actuators (petrol: ignition

coils, electrovalves, oxygen sensors, injectors,
F10 30 heaters, fuel pump, electronic thermostat)
(Diesel: electrovalves, heaters).

F11 40 Air conditioning blower.

203
 Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)

F12 30 Windscreen wipers slow/fast speed.

F13 40 Built-in systems interface supply (ignition positive).

F14 30 Air pump.

F15 10 Right-hand main beam headlamp.

F16 10 Left-hand main beam headlamp.

F17 15 Left-hand dipped headlamp.

F18 15 Right-hand dipped headlamp.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION

Oil vapour heater (1.6 litre VTi), Turbo pressure

F19 15 regulation electrovalve (Diesel), engine coolant
level detector (Diesel).

Electronic thermostat, variable timing electrovalves,

F20 10 Turbo pressure regulation electrovalve (Diesel),
engine coolant level detector (Diesel).

Fan assembly relay supply, Valvetronic relay

F21 5 control (1.6 litre VTi), Turbo cooling (1.6 litre THP),
air flow sensor (1.6 litre HDI).

204
 Table of mini and midi-fuses above the battery
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions
F1 - Not used.
F2 5 Dual function brake switch.
F3 5 Battery charge unit.
F4 25 ABS/ESP electrovalves.
F5 5 ABS/ESP control unit.

F6 15 Automatic gearbox, electronic gear control gearbox.

F7* 80 Power steering electropump assembly.

F8* 60 Fan assembly.
Pre-heat unit (Diesel), Valvetronic electric motor
F9* 80/30

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
(1.6 litre THP).
F10* 40 ABS/ESP electropump assembly.
F11* 100 Switching and protection unit.
Electronic gear control gearbox electropump
F12* 30 assembly.
Table of maxi-fuses
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions
MF1* - Not used.
MF2* 30 Trailer fuse box.
MF3* 50 Passenger compartment fusebox.
MF4* 80 Built-in systems interface.
MF5* 80 Built-in systems interface.
* The maxi-fuses and certain other fuses MF6* 30 Electric parking brake.
provide additional protection for the elec-
trical systems. All work on the these fus- MF7* 30 Heated front seats.
es must be carried out by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop. MF8* 20 Headlamp wash.
205
 12 V BATTERY Access to the battery
Procedure for charging your battery
when it is flat or for starting the engine
using another battery.

The presence of this label indicates the

use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with spe-
cial technology and specification, for
which the involvement of a PEUGEOT
dealer or qualified workshop is required The battery is located under the bonnet.
when replacing or disconnecting the To gain access to it:
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

battery. ) open the bonnet using the interior

Failure to observe this recommendation release lever, then the exterior safety
may cause premature wear of the battery. catch,
) secure the bonnet stay,
) remove the plastic cover to gain ac-
After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start cess to the two terminals,
system will only be active after several ) unclip the fusebox to remove the
hours depending on the climatic condi- battery, if necessary.
tions and the state of charge of the battery
(up to about 8 hours).
Starting using another battery
The Stop & Start battery does not have
to be disconnected for charging. ) Connect the red cable to the posi-
tive terminal (+) of the flat battery A,
then to the positive terminal (+) of
the slave battery B.
) Connect one end of the green or
black cable to the negative termi- ) Operate the starter, let the engine
nal (-) of the slave battery B. run.
) Connect the other end of the green ) Wait until the engine returns to idle
or black cable to the earth point C and disconnect the cables.
on your vehicle (engine mounting).
Disconnecting the cables Charging the battery using a
Do not disconnect the terminals
) Raise the locking tab fully. battery charger while the engine is running.
) Disconnect the battery from the vehicle. Do not charge the batteries
) Follow the instructions for use pro- without disconnecting the ter-
vided by the manufacturer of the minals first.
charger. Do not push the vehicle to start the
) Reconnect starting with the nega- engine if it is fitted with a 6-speed
tive terminal (-). electronic gear control gearbox or an
automatic gearbox.
) Check that the terminals and con-
nectors are clean. If they are
covered with sulphate (whitish or
greenish deposit), remove them and
clean them.
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the
ignition before disconnecting the battery.
Reconnecting the cables Close the windows and the doors be-
The batteries contain harmful

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
) Position the open clip 1 of the cable substances such as sulphuric fore disconnecting the battery.
on the positive terminal (+) of the acid and lead. They must be
battery. disposed of in accordance with regu-
) Press vertically on the clip 1 to posi- lations and must not, in any circum-
tion it correctly against the battery. stances, be discarded with household
) Lock the clip by spreading the position- waste. Following reconnection of the
ing lug and then lowering the tab 2. Take used remote control batteries battery
and vehicle batteries to a special col- Following reconnection of the battery,
lection point. switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute
before starting to permit initialisation
of the electronic systems. However, if
problems remain following this opera-
tion, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Do not force the tab as locking It is advisable to disconnect qualified workshop.
will not be possible if the clip is the battery if the vehicle is to Referring to the corresponding section,
not positioned correctly; start be left unused for more than you must yourself reinitialise:
the procedure again. one month.
- the remote control key,
- the panoramic sunroof blind,
- the satellite navigation system.
 LOAD REDUCTION MODE CHANGING A WIPER BLADE
If the telephone is being used
System which manages the use of cer- at this time:
tain functions according to the level of
charge remaining in the battery. - it will be maintained for 5 minutes with
When the vehicle is being driven, the load the hands-free kit of your Peugeot
reduction function temporarily deactivates Connect Sound or Peugeot Connect
certain functions, such as the air condi- Navigation,
tioning, the heated rear screen... - it will still be possible to finish the
The deactivated functions are reactivated call with the Peugeot Connect
automatically as soon as conditions permit. Media.

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE Exiting economy mode

System which manages the duration of These functions are reactivated auto-
use of certain functions to conserve a matically next time the vehicle is driven.
sufficient level of charge in the battery. To restore the use of these functions im- Before removing a front wiper
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

After the engine has stopped, you can mediately, start the engine and let it run blade
still use functions such as the audio and for at least 5 minutes.
telematics system, windscreen wip- ) Within one minute after switching off
ers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy the ignition, operate the wiper stalk
lamps, etc. for a maximum combined to position the wiper blades verti-
duration of thirty minutes. cally on the windscreen.
This period may be greatly reduced if Removing
the battery is not fully charged.
) Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
) Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Switching to economy mode
Let the engine run for the Fitting
Once this time has elapsed, a message duration specified to ensure
appears in the screen indicating that that the battery charge is suf- ) Put the corresponding new wiper
the vehicle has switched to economy ficient. blade in place and clip it.
mode and the active functions are put Do not repeatedly and continuously ) Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
on standby. restart the engine in order to charge
the battery. After fitting a front wiper blade
A flat battery prevents the engine
from starting (refer to the "Battery" ) Switch on the ignition.
paragraph). ) Operate the wiper stalk again to
park the wiper blades.

208
TOWING THE VEHICLE Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed
or for towing another vehicle using a re-
movable towing eye.

Access to the tools

) On the front bumper, unclip the cov- ) On the rear bumper, unclip the cover
er by pressing at the bottom. by pressing at the bottom.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
) Screw the towing eye in fully. ) Screw the towing eye in fully.
) Install the towing bar. ) Install the towing bar.
) Switch on the hazard warning lamps ) Switch on the hazard warning lamps
on the towed vehicle. on the towed vehicle.
The towing eye is installed under the
left-hand concertina board, in the boot
interior trim.
To gain access to it:
) open the boot,
) raise the concertina board, ) Place the gear lever in neu-
) remove the towing eye from the tral (position N on the elec-
holder. tronic gear control gearbox
or automatic gearbox).
Failure to observe this special con-
dition could result in damage to cer-
tain braking components and the
absence of braking assistance the
next time the engine is started.

209
 TOWING A TRAILER, Driving with a trailer places greater de-
General A CARAVAN, ETC. mands on the towing vehicle and the
recommendations driver must take particular care.
Observe the legislation in force in Towbar suitable for the attachment of a
your country. trailer or caravan with additional lighting Driving advice
Ensure that the weight of the tow- and signalling.
ing vehicle is higher than that of the Distribution of loads
towed vehicle.
) Distribute the load in the trailer so
The driver must stay at the wheel of that the heaviest items are as close
the towed vehicle. as possible to the axle and the nose
Driving on motorways and fast roads weight approaches the maximum
is prohibited when towing. permitted without exceeding it.
When towing a vehicle with all four Air density decreases with altitude, thus
wheels on the ground, always use an reducing engine performance. Above
approved towing bar; rope and straps 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load
are prohibited. must be reduced by 10 % for every
When towing a vehicle with the en- 1 000 metres of altitude.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section for
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

gine off, there is no longer any power

assistance for braking or steering. details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is primarily designed for

In the following cases, you must al- transporting people and luggage, but it
ways call on a professional recovery may also be used for towing a trailer.
service: Side wind
- vehicle broken down on a motor- ) Take into account the increased
way or fast road, We recommend the use of sensitivity to side wind.
- when it is not possible to put the genuine PEUGEOT towbars
gearbox into neutral, unlock the and their harnesses that have Cooling
steering, or release the parking been tested and approved from the
brake, design stage of your vehicle, and that Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the fitting of the towbar is entrusted the temperature of the coolant.
- towing with only two wheels on
the ground, to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified As the fan is electrically controlled, its
workshop. cooling capacity is not dependent on
- where there is no approved towing the engine speed.
bar available... If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it is imperative ) To lower the engine speed, reduce
that it is fitted in accordance with the your speed.
vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

210
The maximum towed load on a long in- FITTING ROOF BARS
cline depends on the gradient and the Maximum authorised weight
ambient temperature. on the roof rack, for a loading
height not exceeding 40 cm
In all cases, keep a check on the cool- (with the exception of bicycle
ant temperature. carriers): 65 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
the speed of the vehicle to the pro-
file of the road to avoid damaging the
) If the warning lamp and the roof bars and the fixings on the roof.
STOP warning lamp come Be sure to refer to national legislation
on, stop the vehicle and in order to comply with the regula-
switch off the engine as tions for transporting objects that are
soon as possible. longer than the vehicle.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking
distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
long mountain type of descent, the use
of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres When fitting transverse roof bars, use

the four quick-fit fixings provided for this
) Check the tyre pressures of the tow- purpose:
ing vehicle and of the trailer, observ- ) lift the concealing flaps,
ing the recommended pressures.
) open the fixing covers on each bar
using the key,
) put each fixing in place and lock
Lighting them on the roof one by one,
) Check the electrical lighting and sig- ) ensure that roof bars are correctly
nalling on the trailer. fitted (by shaking them),
) close the fixing covers on each bar
using the key.
If your vehicle is fitted with
The rear parking sensors will roof finishers, do not use them
be deactivated automatically if for carrying loads.
a genuine PEUGEOT towbar
is used.

211
 VERY COLD CLIMATE SCREEN Fitting Removal
Removable protective screen which
prevents the accumulation of snow at
the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen,
ensure that the engine is off and cool-
ing fan has stopped. It is recommended
that the screen be fitted and removed
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.

) Offer up one of the three screens to Depending on the model, the clips point either
the front of the lower section of the to the left or to the right.
PRACTICAL INFORMATION

front bumper (do not use the upper ) Pass your fingers through the upper grille
ventilation grille position). location.
) Press on the edges A to engage its ) From behind, push the clips in the opposite
fixing clips. direction then pull the part towards you.
) Press on the middle at B to com- ) Start with the upper screen 1, then the
plete the engagement of the fixing centre screen 2 and finish with the lower
clips. screen 3.
) Repeat the operation for the other
two screens.
Do not forget to remove the
very cold climate screen:

- when the ambient temperature

exceeds 10 °C,
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

212
ACCESSORIES "Protection":
Depending on the legislation
A wide range of accessories and genu- mats*, boot tray, luggage net, coat in force in the country, it may
ine parts is available from the PEUGEOT hanger fixed on head restraint, stainless be compulsory to have a high
dealer network. steel or carbon fibre style door sills. visibility safety vest, warning triangle
and spare bulbs and fuses available
These accessories and parts have been in the vehicle.
tested and approved for reliability and
safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and
benefit from PEUGEOT's recommenda- "Multimedia":
tion and warranty. The fitting of electrical equip-
audio systems, amplifiers, satellite navigation ment or accessories which
systems, Bluetooth hands-free system, CD are not recommended by
changer, speakers, DVD player, USB Box, PEUGEOT may result in a failure of
"Transport solutions": front and rear parking sensors, additional your vehicle's electronic system and
For leisure pursuits: roof bars, bicycle Bluetooth wireless headphones, Bluetooth excessive electrical consumption.
carrier on towbar, bicycle carrier on roof audio headphones mains charger.
Please note this precaution. You are
bars, ski carrier, roof box, booster seats advised to contact a PEUGEOT rep-
and child seats, side blinds, under shelf resentative to be shown the range

PRACTICAL INFORMATION
storage. of recommended equipment and ac-
Trailer towbar, which must be fitted by a cessories.
PEUGEOT dealer.
Installation of radio
communication
"Style": transmitters
Before installing any after-market ra- You can also obtain cleaning and main-
seat covers compatible with lateral air- tenance products (exterior and interior),
bags, leather gear lever knob, foglamps, dio communication transmitter, you
can contact a PEUGEOT dealer for products for topping up (screenwash
door deflectors, spoiler, styling strips, fluid...) and refills (sealant cartridge
alloy wheels, trims, chrome-plated door the specification of transmitters which
can be fitted (frequency, maximum for the temporary puncture repair kit...)
handle shells. from PEUGEOT dealers.
power, aerial position, specific instal-
lation requirements), in line with the
Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
"Safety and security":
anti-theft alarm, window etching, wheel
security bolts, first aid kit, breathalyzer, * To avoid any risk of jamming of the
warning triangle, high visibility vest, sto- pedals:
len vehicle tracking system, dog guard, - ensure that the mat is positioned
snow chains. and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
213
 ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

1.6 litre VTi 1.6 litre THP

Petrol engine
120 hp 156 hp

Manual Manual Automatic

Gearbox
(5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598

Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8

Max power: EU standard (kW) 88 115

Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000

Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 160 240

Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded

Catalytic converter yes yes

TECHNICAL DATA

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 4.25 4.25

Gearbox - Final drive - -

214
 WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
1.6 litre VTi 1.6 litre THP
Petrol engine
120 hp 156 hp
Manual Manual (6-speed)/
Gearbox
(5-speed) Automatic (6 speed)
Seats 5 7 5 7
- Unladen weight 1 427 1 454 1 460 1 490
- Kerb weight* 1 502 1 532 1 535 1 565
- Payload 573 736 590 735

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 000 2 190 2 050 2 225

- Gross train weight (GTW)

3 200 3 290 3 400 3 425
on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

1 200 1 100 1 350 1 200
on a 10% or 12% gradient

- Braked trailer** (with load transfer

TECHNICAL DATA
1 400 1 550 1 500
within the GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
 ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi 2 litre Turbo HDi 2 litre Turbo HDi
Diesel engine
110 hp 150 hp 163 hp
Manual Electronic gear control Manual Automatic
Gearbox
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 997

Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 85 x 88

Max power: EU standard (kW) 82 110/120

Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 750

Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 270 320/340

Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 2 000

Fuel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter yes yes

Particle emission filter yes yes

TECHNICAL DATA

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 -

 WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi

Diesel engine
110 hp
Manual Electronic gear control
Gearbox
(6-speed) (6-speed)

Seats 5 7 5 7

- Unladen weight 1 475 1 502 1 475 1 502

- Kerb weight* 1 550 1 578 1 550 1 578

- Payload 595 748 595 748

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 070 2 250 2 070 2 250

- Gross train weight (GTW)

3 170 3 250 3 170 3 150
on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

1 100 1 000 1 100 900
on a 10% or 12% gradient

TECHNICAL DATA
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 100
within the GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 745 750 745 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
217
 WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi

Diesel engine
110 hp
Manual Electronic gear control
Gearbox
(6-speed) Score (6-speed) Score

Seats 5 7 5 7

- Unladen weight 1 475 1 502 1 475 1 502

- Kerb weight* 1 550 1 578 1 550 1 578

- Payload 595 748 595 748

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 070 2 250 2 070 2 250

- Gross vehicle weight (MTRA)

2 950 2 950 2 920 2 950
on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

880 700 850 700
on a10% or 12% gradient
TECHNICAL DATA

- Braked trailer** (with load transfer 1 080 900 1 050 900

within the GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 745 750 745 700

- Recommended nose weight 70 70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
218
 WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)

2 litre Turbo HDi 2 litre Turbo HDi

Diesel engine
150 hp 163 hp
Manual Automatic
Gearbox
(6-speed) (6-speed)

Seats 5 7 5 7

- Unladen weight 1 563 1 593 1 589 1 619

- Kerb weight* 1 638 1 668 1 664 1 694

- Payload 562 717 536 711

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 125 2 310 2 125 2 330

- Gross train weight (GTW)

3 475 3 510 3 525 3 530
on a 12% gradient

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

1 350 1 200 1 400 1 200
on a 10% or 12% gradient

TECHNICAL DATA
- Braked trailer** (with load transfer 1 550 1 500 1 600 1 500
within the GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 70

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an
equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
219
 WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS - 5008 5-seat LCV (in kg)

1.6 litre Turbo e-HDi 2 litre Turbo HDi

Engine
110 hp 150 hp
Manual Electronic gear control Manual Manual
Gearbox
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model codes 9HZ 9HZ 9HR RHE
- Unladen weight 1 481 1 482 1 481 1 572
- Kerb weight* 1 556 1 557 1 556 1 647

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 225 2 230 2 200 2 310

- Gross train weight (GTW)

3 120 3 170 3 475
on a 12% gradient***

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

895 890 970 1 165
on a 10% or 12% gradient****

- Braked trailer (with load transfer X X X X

within the GTW limit)
TECHNICAL DATA

- Unbraked trailer 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 70

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum rear axle weight involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined in point 2.7 of
the Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when the vehicle is towing involves limiting the speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) as defined
in point 2.7 of the Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an
adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10% for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient
temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
220
DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

TECHNICAL DATA
221
 IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS B. Vehicle identification Number (VIN) on D. Tyre/paint label.
the windscreen lower crossmember. This label is fitted to the door aperture
Various visible markings for the identifi- This number is indicated on a self- or middle pillar, on the driver's side.
cation and tracing of your vehicle. adhesive label which is visible It bears the following information:
through the windscreen.
- the tyre inflation pressures with and
C. Manufacturer's label. without load,
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The VIN is indicated on a self- - the wheel rim and tyre sizes,
under the bonnet. destroying label affixed to the door
aperture, on the driver's side. - the brands of tyre recommended by
This number is engraved on the the manufacturer,
bodywork near the damper support. - the inflation pressure of the spare
wheel,
- the paint colour code.

The tyre pressures must be

checked when the tyres are
cold, at least once a month.
TECHNICAL DATA

Low tyre pressures increase

fuel consumption.

222
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
223
 EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

In an emergency, press this button for more than Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
message confirm that the call has been made to the A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.
PEUGEOT Emergency team*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green
LED goes off.
A press (at any time) of more than 8 seconds on this button, cancels the OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
request.
When the ignition is switched on, the green
The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
established. It goes off at the end of communication. the system is operating correctly.

If the orange LED flashes: there is a system

This call is dealt with by the PEUGEOT Emergency team which receives fault.
locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the If the orange LED is on continuously: the
appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not backup battery must be replaced.
operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined,
the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the In either case, contact a PEUGEOT.
vehicle location.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services
If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
automatically.

For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of PEUGEOT

* These services are subject to conditions and availability. CONNECT services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer. carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

224
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING
Peugeot Connect Media

Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not Press this button for access to PEUGEOT services.
operational.

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible Select "Customer call" to request
signal is heard and a "Confirmation/Cancellation" any information about the PEUGEOT RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted). marque. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

A call is made to the PEUGEOT Emergency team

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

which receives locating information from the vehicle Customer call

and can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency
services.
In countries in which the team is not operational, or
when the locating service has been expressly declined, Select "PEUGEOT Assistance"
the call is sent to the emergency services (112). to make a roadside assistance call. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

PEUGEOT Assistance

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently

of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made
automatically. This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a
PEUGEOT dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the
flashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction. configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer. wishes.

225
226
 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3
Peugeot Connect Media
ABC DEF

4 5 6

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
GPS EUROPE

CONTENTS
The Peugeot Connect Media is protected in such a 01 First steps p. 228
way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be
installed in another vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer 02 Voice commands and p. 230
for configuration of the system. steering mounted controls
03 General operation p. 233
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 238
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver
carries out operations which require prolonged attention 05 Traffic information p. 247
while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent 06 Radio p. 249
discharging of the battery, the Peugeot Connect Media
switches off following the activation of the Energy 07 Music media players p. 250
Economy mode.
08 Using the telephone p. 255
09 Configuration p. 260
10 Screen menu map p. 261
Certain functions described in this handbook will
become available during the course of the year.
Frequently asked questions p. 266

227
 01 FIRST STEPS
Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) CONTROL PANEL

Access to the Media Menu

(audio CD, Jukebox, Abandon the current
Auxiliary input). operation.
Access to the Navigation
Display the list of tracks. Menu and display recent Long press: return to main Access to the Address book
Change the audio source. destinations. display. Access to the Traffic Menu. Menu.

Access to the Radio Menu Access to the "SETUP" menu

Display the list of stations in (configuration).
alphabetical order (FM band) or
frequency order (AM band). Long press: GPS coverage.

Audio settings (Balance/

Fader, Bass/Treble, Musical
ambience...).
Enter the numbers or letters
using the alpha-numeric keypad.
Adjust volume (each source Presetting 10 radio frequencies.
is independent, including
navigation messages and alerts).
Long press: reinitialise the
system.
Short press: mute.

Automatic search down/up for SD card reader. Short press: clears the last
radio frequencies. character.
Select previous/next CD or MP3
track.

228
 01 FIRST STEPS
Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4 3D) NAVIGATOR

Select successive display in

the screen of "MAP"/"NAV" (if CALL: access to the Phone
navigation in progress)/"TEL" (if menu.
a call is in progress)/"RADIO" or Bluetooth connection, accept
Press to left/right: "MEDIA" being played. an incoming call.
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
select the previous/next frequency.
With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
select the previous/next track.
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
horizontal movement on the map.
Rotate the dial:
With display of the "RADIO" screen:
Press up/down: select the previous/next radio station in
With display of the "RADIO" screen: the list.
select the previous/next radio station in With display of the "MEDIA" screen:
the list. select the previous/next CD or MP3
With display of the "MEDIA" screen: track.
select the MP3 folder. With display of the "MAP" or "NAV":
With display of the "MAP" or "NAV": zoom the map in/out.
vertical movement on the map. Movement of the menu selection cursor.
Go the the next or previous page in a
menu.
Movement on the virtual keypad
displayed.
Normal display or black screen. END CALL: access to the
OK: confirm the highlighted item. Phone menu.
End a call in progress or reject
an incoming call, Bluetooth
connection.

229
 02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
VOICE COMMANDS - GENERAL Help address book Access to the address book help
VOICE RECO. INITIATION Help voice control Access to the voice recognition help
Help media Access to the media management help
Help navigation Access to the guidance, navigation help
Help telephone Access to the telephone help
1
Help radio Access to the radio help
Before using the system for the first time, you are advised to listen Cancel To cancel a voice command which is in
progress
to, say and practice the tutorial.
Correction Request
q to correct the last voice
recognition carried out
Clear
RADIO Select station Select a radio station
2 Station <tts:stationName> Select a radio station using its RDS
description <tts:station Name> from the
RADIO list
Press the SETUP button and select Read out station list Listen to the list of stations available
the "Language & Speech" function. NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Enter frequency Listen to the frequency of the current

Turn the ring and select "Voice control".
1 2 3

SETUP
ABC DEF

4 5 6

radio station
GHI JKL MNO

Activate voice recognition.

7 8 9

Select wave band

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)

Select "Tutorial". AM
Change the frequency waveband to AM
FM
Change the frequency waveband to FM
TA on
Activate Traffic Info (TA)
TA off
Deactivate Traffic Info

NAVIGATION Destination input Command to enter a new destination

The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in address
the tables below. Voice advice off Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions
Speak and Peugeot Connect Media acts. Voice advice on Activate the spoken guidance instructions
Save address Save an address in the address book
Start guidance Start guidance (once the address has
been entered)
Abort guidance Stop the guidance
Pressing the end of the lighting Navigate entry Start guidance to an entry in the address book
control stalk activates voice POI Search Start guidance to a point of interest
recognition.

230
02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
VOICE COMMANDS - MEDIA Media Select the MEDIA source
VOICE RECO. INITIATION Select media Choose a source
Single slot Select the CD player source
Jukebox Select the Jukebox source
USB Select the USB player source
External device Select the audio AUX input source
SD-Card Select the SD card source
Track <1 - 1 000> Select a specific track (number between
1 and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM
Folder <1 - 1 000> Select a Folder (number between 1 and
1 000) on the active MEDIUM

TELEPHONE Phone menu Open the Telephone Menu

Enter number Enter a telephone number to be called
Phone book Open the phone book
Dial Make a call
Save number Save a number in the phone book
Accept Accept an incoming call
Reject Reject an incoming call

ADDRESS Address book menu Open the address book

BOOK Call <entry> Call file using its <file> description as
described in the address book
Navigate <entry> Start guidance to an address in the
address book using its <file> description

231
 02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Wiper stalk: display "RADIO" and "MEDIA".
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS Lighting stalk: activate voice commands with a short press; indication of the
current navigation instruction with a long press.

Radio: select the previous/next pre-set Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency.
station. CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the next track.
CD audio: select the previous/next track CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast
If "MEDIA" is displayed in the screen: forwards.
MP3 CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the
previous/next folder.
Select the previous/next item in the contacts
list. Volume increase.

Change audio source. Mute: press the volume

Start a call from the contacts list increase and decrease
Call/hang up the telephone. buttons simultaneously.
Confirm a selection. The sound is restored by
Press for more than 2 seconds: pressing one of the two
telephone menu. volume buttons.

Volume decrease.

Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency.

CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: select the previous track.
CD/SD CARD/JUKEBOX: continuous press: fast
backwards.

232
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA/ FULL SCREEN MAP

VIDEO

TELEPHONE NAVIGATION
(If a conversation is in progress) (If guidance is in progress)

TRAFFIC TRAFFIC:
SETUP: access to the Traffic Menu: display of the current
traffic alerts.
SETUP access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language*
and voice functions*, voice initialisation (section 09),
date and time*, display, unit and system parameters.
MEDIA
MEDIA:
* Available according to model. "DVD-audio" menu
"DVD-Video" menu

Longg press:
p access to the GPS coverage and to the
demonstration mode. For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth "Screen menu map" section of this handbook.
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.

233
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Trip info TELEPHONE:

Pressing OK gives access to short-cut 2
menus according to the display on the
screen. Route type End call
1
3

Avoid Hold call

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN 3
1
PROGRESS):
Satellites Dial
Abort guidance 3
1
1

Stopovers DTMF-Tones
Repeat advice 3
1
1

Browse route Private mode

Block road 2
1
1

Zoom/Scroll Micro off

Unblock 2
1
2

More Voice advice MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

2 1

Less Route options TA

1 1
2

Calculate Route type Play options

2 1
2

Zoom/Scroll Route dynamics Normal order

2 2
2

Browse route Avoidance criteria Random track

2 2
2

Route info Recalculate Scan

1 2 2

Show destination Select media

2 1

234
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

RADIO: FULL SCREEN MAP: North Up

2

In FM mode Abort guidance/Resume guidance Heading Up

1 1 2

TA Set destination/Add stopover Zoom/Scroll

2 1 1

RDS POIs nearby

2 1

Radiotext Position info

2 1

AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Regional prog. Guidance options
2 2

Stop
AM Navigate to 1
2 3

In AM mode Group
Dial 2
1 3

TA Group 1 .2/n
2
Save position 3
3

Refresh AM list Play options

2
Zoom/Scroll 2
3

FM Normal order/Random track/Scan

2
Map Settings 3
1

TA
2D Map 1
2

Select media
2.5D Map 2
2

3D Map
2

235
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS): Examples:

Play
1

Stop
2

DVD menus
2

DVD menu
3

DVD top menu

3

List of titles
3

List of chapters
3

DVD Options
2

Audio
3

Subtitles
3

Angle
3

236
 Peugeot Connect Media IS:

- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed flat, in perspective or in 3D.

Flat map

Map in perspective

Map in 3D

- configuration of the system by means of voice commands.

237
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.
SELECTING A DESTINATION During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the
last guidance instruction.

1 4
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
Select the "Address input" function
and press OK to confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV 1 2 3

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF 1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Address input
p

5
Once the country has been selected,
ADDR

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

turn the ring and select the town

ABC DEF

Menu function.
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

function. Press OK to confirm.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2 6
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and Select the letters of the town one
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
ADDR RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3

by one confirming each time by

ABC DEF
ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9

pressing OK.
PQRS TUV WXYZ
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 # * 0 #

Navigation
g Menu

3
Select the "Destination input"
A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

function and press OK to confirm. 1 2 3

country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

keypad.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Destination input
p

238
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible
to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".
Press OK then select "Map Settings" and confirm.

7 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
9
Turn the ring and select OK. 1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Then select "Start route guidance" RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and the press OK to confirm.

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

Press OK to confirm.
7 8 9 1 2 3
PQRS TUV WXYZ ABC DEF

4 5 6
* 0 # GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Start route guidance

g
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
10
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits. Select the route type: RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

"Fast route", "Short route", or

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

"Optimized route" and press OK to

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

8 * 0 #

confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

and "House number" functions. 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

11
Select the road with the colour RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address corresponding to the route chosen 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

entered in a directory file. Press OK to confirm the selection.

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

and press OK to confirm and start 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

The Peugeot Connect Media allows more than 4 000 contact guidance.
records to be saved.

To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last

destinations". It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".
from which you can select:

Delete entry
y Delete list Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

239
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY
"HOME ADDRESS"

Select your home address and confirm.

To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be Then select "Edit entry" and confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

entered in the address book, for example from "Destination

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Edit entry

1 4

Press the NAV button twice to display Select "Set as Home address" and
the Navigation Menu.
ADDR NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

confirm to save.
BOOK

NAV 1 2 3 1 2 3
ABC DEF ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Navigation Menu Set as home address

2
Select "Destination input" and confirm.
Then select "Choose from address
To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

book" and confirm.

BOOK

1 2 3

Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and confirm.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.
0 #

Destination input

240
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings"
ROUTE OPTIONS then "2D Map/2.5D Map/3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of
buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.

1 5
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV 1 2 3

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF

This function provides access to

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

the "Traffic independent", "Semi-

1 2 3
* 0 # ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

dynamic" and "Dynamic" options.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2 Route dynamics
y
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

6
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Select the "Avoidance criteria"

Navigation
g Menu function. This function provides access RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

to the "Avoid" options (motorways, toll 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

roads, ferries, tunnels).

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

3
Select the "Route options" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

and press OK to confirm.

BOOK

Avoidance criteria
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Route options
p 7
Turn the ring and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
4 account the route options selected.
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the "Route type" function and 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

Press OK to confirm.
4 5 6

press OK to confirm. This function

ADDR GHI JKL MNO
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

1 2 3
* 0 #

allows you to change the route type.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Recalculate
Route type
yp

241
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination
ADDING A STOPOVER has been selected.

5
Enter a new address, for example. NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA SETUP
BOOK 1 2 3
ABC DEF

NAV 1 2 3
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF

7 8 9
4 5 6 PQRS TUV WXYZ
GHI JKL MNO

7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
* 0 #

* 0 #

Address input
p

6 Once the new address has

been entered, select "Start route
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

2
BOOK

1 2 3

Press the NAV button again or select guidance" and press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

the "Navigation" Menu function and

ADDR PQRS TUV WXYZ
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

* 0 #

1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

Start route guidance

g
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

"Navigation"
g Menu 7 NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Position the stopover on the list and 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

3 press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Select the "Stopovers" function and

* 0 #

press OK to confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Stopovers
p 8
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select
"Recalculate" and press OK to confirm.

4 Select the "Add stopover" function

(5 stopovers maximum) and press RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select

OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
list using the ring to change the order, confirm its new position and
0 #

Add stopover
p finish with "Recalculate").

242
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the
(POI) vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
6 Select the "POI in city" function to
NAV 1 2 3
search for POIs in the city required. ADDR

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP
ABC DEF

4 5 6

Select the country then enter the name

GHI JKL MNO
1 2 3
ABC DEF
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

* 0

of the city using the virtual keypad.

#
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI in city
y
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

press OK to confirm. 4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

* 0 #

Navigation
g Menu A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
3 Select the "POI search" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

7
POI search Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

required.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

4
7 8 9

Select the "POI nearby" function to

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ADDR
* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

search for POIs around the vehicle. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

POI in country
y
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI nearby
y
8
Select the "POI near route" function
5 Select the "POI near destination" to search for POIs near the route.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

function to search for POIs near the

ABC DEF
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

1 2 3 7 8 9

point of arrival of the route.

ABC DEF PQRS TUV WXYZ

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
* 0 #

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI near destination POI near route

243
 This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

244
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
UPDATING POIs

1 3 Press NAV, select Navigation Menu,

then "Settings", then "Update personal
POI".
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV
Download the "POIs" update file onto an SD Navigation
g Menu
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

card or USB memory stick from the Internet. This

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

service is available at wipinforadars.co.uk. Settings

Update
p personal
p POI

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

The files must be copied to the root on the chosen medium. Select the medium ("USB" or "SD- 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

Card") used and press OK.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2
5
Insert the medium (SD card or USB memory
stick) containing the POI database into the Successful downloading is confirmed by a message.
system's SD card reader or USB port. The system restarts.
The POIs version can be found in the SETUP\System menu.

245
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS

When the navigation is displayed in 3

the screen, press OK then select or
deselect "Voice advice" to activate RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

or deactivate the spoken guidance Select the "Settings" function and

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

instructions. press OK to confirm.

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

1 2 3
* 0 # ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

Use the volume button to adjust

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

the volume. Settings

The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted
during this type of alert.
4
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
POINTS OF INTEREST AND RISK AREAS RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2
ABC
3
DEF

SETTINGS
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI categories
g on Map
p
1 Press the NAV button.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

5
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
2 map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
Press the NAV button again or select
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

functions.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

the Navigation Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
* 0 #

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Navigation
g Menu Set p
parameters for risk areas

246
 05 The TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages provide information
relating to traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and
transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.
DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES

1 4 Select the filter of your choice:

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

TRAFFIC
Messages
g on route
1 2 3 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

Press the TRAFFIC button.

ABC DEF BOOK

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
1 2 3
ABC DEF
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

* 0 #

All warning
g messages
g
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Only
y warnings
g on route
All messages
g

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted 5
in order of proximity. Select "Geo. Filter".
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Geo. Filter

2 Press the TRAFFIC button again or

select the Traffic Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition
press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
of a geographic filter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles
7
PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

# (5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed

on the map. The geographic filter follows the movement of
Traffic Menu the vehicle.

3 The filters are independent and their results are concealed.

We recommend:
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Select "Select preferred list" and 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

- a filter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffic,
4 5 6

press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

- a filter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a filter on

the route on motorway journeys.

247
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

1 - the station transmits TA messages.

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert

messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio
station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is
transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted
automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio
source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example: 1

With the current audio source
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

displayed on the screen, press the

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

dial. * 0 #

2 The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

TA

3
Select Traffic Announcements (TA)
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

and press the dial to confirm and go

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

to the associated settings. * 0 #

248
 The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may

06 RADIO interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon
is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in
any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

SELECTING A STATION RDS - REGIONAL MODE

1 RADIO Press the RADIO button to display the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC
1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

list of stations received locally sorted in When the current radio station is 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

alphabetical order. displayed on the screen, press OK.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Select the station required by turning 1 2 3

The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to

2
ABC DEF

4 5 6

the ring and press to confirm.

GHI JKL MNO

the following short-cuts:

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

TA
RDS
While listening to the radio, press buttons and
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

Radiotext
for the automatic search for a lower or higher Regional
g prog.
p g
frequency.
AM

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the function required and

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3

ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the

1 2 3

press OK to confirm to gain access

ABC DEF ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9

previous or next station on the list. to the corresponding settings.

PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same station
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confirms that it has by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
been stored. conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
station. explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

249
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/
USB PLAYER
INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The audio equipment will only play audio files with the extension
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

Connecting an IPod:
To play MP3 type files, connect the IPod using the USB port It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using
(limited functions). of special characters (e.g. : " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and
To play ITunes files, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket (AUX). displaying problems.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing
correctly. the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory
stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted
to FAT 32.

250
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
SELECTING/PLAYING
CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.
SD CARD/USB PLAYER
5
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player, the SD RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the

1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
Press the MEDIA button again or
select the "Media" Menu function and
GHI JKL MNO

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
7 8 9

USB port. Play begins automatically.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

"Media" Menu
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under "Media" Menu.
6
Select the "Select media" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI

7
2
ABC

5
JKL

8
3
DEF

6
MNO

2
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Press this button.

1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Select media
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

7
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

3 Select the music source required. 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

When the "MEDIA" screen is RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

displayed, turn the ring up or down to 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
* 0 #

select the previous or next compatible

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

source.

4 The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.

Press the MEDIA button. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

251
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
JUKEBOX
COPYING A CD, A USB MEMORY STICK OR AN SD CARD When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the
ONTO THE HARD DISK process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.

1 5 NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

Select the tracks required then "Rip

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB

BOOK

1 2 3
ABC DEF
1 2 3
ABC DEF

selection" or select all of the tracks using

4 5 6
4 5 6

memory stick or an SD card.

GHI JKL MNO
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
"Rip all". *
0 # 0 #

6 Select "[New folder]" to create a new RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

folder or select an existing folder

BOOK

Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

(created previously).
4 5 6

(CD, USB or SD card).

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

[New folder]

2 7 "Do you want to change the names of the tracks that

Press the MEDIA button. Press the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

MEDIA
will be ripped?": select "Yes" to change them or "No". 1 2 3

MEDIA button again or select Media

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Menu and press OK to confirm. * 0 #

Yes No

3 Select "Jukebox management" then RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP
8 To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

"Add files" and press OK at each step

BOOK

1 2
ABC
3
DEF
time ripping", "Fast ripping"/"High quality 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

to confirm.
4 5 6 4 5 6

(192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard quality

GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

(128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start ripping".

Add files

4 9
Select "Add files from MP3-Disc" for RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Confirm the warning message by RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

example and press OK to validate. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
pressing "OK" to start the copy.
1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 # * 0 #

Add files from MP3-Disc OK

252
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
JUKEBOX
RENAMING OR DELETING AN LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX
ALBUM
Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able 1
to rename or delete a track/folder. Press the MEDIA button. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA
Press the MEDIA button again or
1 Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox select Media Menu and press OK to
(CD, radio, etc...). confirm.

2 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button. 2

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Select "Jukebox management" and 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

3
Press the MEDIA button again or
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

select Media Menu and press OK to

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

confirm.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

3
* 0 #

Select "Play options" and press OK to RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists"

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

4 Select "Jukebox management" and * 0 #

then press OK to confirm.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Jukebox management
g
Press the ESC button to return to the first file level.
5 Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.
Select "Modify content" and press RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

OK confirm. 1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the
tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists"
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

play mode must then be selected.

* 0 #

Modify
y content

253
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)
VIEWING A VIDEO DVD
AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
1 Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to
Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6 the RCA sockets (white and red for audio; yellow for video) in the
automatically.
GHI JKL MNO

glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2
Press the MEDIA button then press
NAV ESC TRAFFIC

2
RADIO MEDIA

MEDIA
If the DVD does not appear on the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

it again or select the Media Menu

screen, press the MODE button to 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
function and press OK to confirm.
gain access to the "MEDIA" screen
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

which displays the DVD screen.

If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
management" to activate it.
3
Press the MEDIA button to gain
access to the DVD menu at any time, Select "Select media" then "External
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA
3
or to the functions of the Media Menu device (AV)" and press OK to RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3

which adjust the video (brightness/ activate it.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

contrast, image format...).

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

External device

The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move 4
the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the or Select the AUX music source and
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

button. press OK to confirm. Play begins

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

automatically.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device (AV)").

Press OK to confirm. Play begins. The display and management of the controls is via the portable
device.

254
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

To activate the Bluetooth telephone or 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

the internal telephone, press PICK UP.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2
Select Phone menu, then "Select
phone" then choose between
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

phone" or "Use internal phone". Press

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

OK at each step to confirm.

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and

one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.
In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth
telephone.

255
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the SIM
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your
telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you have
FIRST CONNECTION access to.

For safety y reasons and because theyy require prolonged

g attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth 5
Enter the authentication code on the ADDR

mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

telephone. The code to be entered 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

is displayed on the screen of the

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

ignition on. * 0 #

system.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more
help, ...).

1 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect
ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This
instructions). synchronisation may take a few minutes*.

2 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

To pair another telephone, press the

ABC DEF

Press the CALL button.

1 2 3
ABC DEF 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9

TEL button, then select Phone menu,

PQRS TUV WXYZ

7 8 9
*
PQRS TUV WXYZ
0 #

* 0 #

then "Select phone" then "Connect

Bluetooth phone" then select the
telephone required.
3
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

If no telephone has been paired, the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
Press OK at each step to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

system prompts you to "Connect

7 8 9
1 2 3 PQRS TUV WXYZ
ABC DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO * 0 #

phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

confirm.

Pairing can be started from the telephone (refer to the telephone

4 instructions).
Select "Search phone" and press OK
to confirm. Then select the name of
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

the telephone.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

To delete a pairing, press TEL, select "Connect phone" then "Delete

Search phone
p pairing".

256
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to
your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you
TELEPHONE have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of
services is available from dealers.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention

on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth Once the telephone has been connected, the Peugeot Connect
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect Media can synchronise the address book and the call list. This
Media must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
ignition on.

1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is visible to all.

2
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

Press the PICK UP button.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears

in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then
select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete
pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.

257
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you
can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's
WITH A SIM CARD audio system.

1 4
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6 Enter the PIN code on the keypad NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Extract the holder by pressing the GHI

7
JKL

8
MNO

9 then select OK and confirm.

1

4
2
ABC
ABC

5
3
DEF
DEF

eject button.
GHI
GHI JKL
JKL MNO
MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9

PQRS
PQRS TUV
TUV WXYZ
WXYZ

* 0 ##

* 0 #

Remember PIN

2
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to
allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it
is used subsequently.
Install the SIM card in the holder
and then insert it in the slot.

5
The system asks "Do you want
to switch to the internal phone?",
select "Yes" if you wish to use your
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

SIM card for your personal calls.

4 5 6

3
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Otherwise, only the emergency call * 0 #

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1. and the services will use the SIM
card.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise
on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must the address book and the call list.
be carried out when stationary. This synchronisation may take a few minutes.

258
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE Operating the telephone while driving is prohibited. It is recommended
that you park safely or use in preference the steering mounted controls.

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed Press the PICK UP button.
1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

display in the screen.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
2 Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP appears under Phone menu. You can select a number and press
to refuse and confirm by pressing OK. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
OK to make the call.
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Yes No 2 Select the Phone menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

The PICK UP button accepts, the HANG UP button rejects the Phone menu
incoming call.
3 Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

keypad.
ABC DEF

3 To hang up, press the HANG UP

4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

button or press OK and select "End * 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

call" then confirm by pressing OK.

1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Dial number
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You

End call can select "Dial from address book". The Peugeot Connect Media
can record up to 4 096 entries.

Press the end of the steering mounted control for

Press the end of the steering mounted control to more than two seconds to open the address book.
accept the call or end the call in progress.
It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone; park
the vehicle as a safety measure.
259
 Principle of GPS synchronisation (GMT):
09 CONFIGURATION 1. Confirm the "Synchronise with GPS" selection, the time is then set to
GMT universal time, the date is also updated.
2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move the cursor to the time fields and
press OK.
3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME Note that when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone
must be changed again manually.

This setting operation must be carried out if the battery has been 5
disconnected.
Select the "Date format" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

1 Select the format required using the 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

SETUP
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2
ABC
3
DEF
ring and press OK to confirm.
Press the SETUP button. 4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

* 0 #

6
2 Select the "Date & Time" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Select the "Time format" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

7
PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

#
press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

Select the format required using the

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Date & Time

* 0 #

ring and press OK to confirm.

3
Select the "Set date & time" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI

7
2
ABC

5
JKL

8
3
DEF

6
MNO

9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds permits

Set date & time access to:

4 Description
p of the unit
Make the adjustments using the ring RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and move on to the next using the 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6 GPS coverage
g
4-direction navigator.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Press OK to confirm. Demo mode

260
 10 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
MAIN FUNCTION 4
Within 6 miles (10 km)
3
Create folder

Within 30 miles (50 km) Modify content

OPTION A 4 3
2
Read out settings Edit playlist
option A1 2 3
3
On confirmation Play options
option A2 3 3
3
Incoming messages Folders & Files
OPTION B... 3 4
2
TMC station information Playlists
2 4
TRAFFIC
Memory capacity
3

1
"Traffic" Menu MEDIA

Sound settings
2

Select preferred list 1

"Media" Menu Refer to the "Sound settings" menu details
2
of which are shown on the next page.
3
Messages on route Select media
3 2

Only warnings on route Audio CD/MP3-Disc

c/DVD-Audio
o/DVD-Video Video settings
3 3 2

All warning messages Jukebox (Folders & Files) Aspect ratio

3 3 3

All messages SD-Card Menu language

3 3 3

Geo. Filter USB Display

3 3 3

Deactivate PIN External device (audio/AV) Brightness

4 3 4

Within 2 miles (3 km) Jukebox management Contrast

4 2 4

Within 3 miles (5 km) Add files Colour

4 3 4

261
 AUX standard Classic Start route guidance
3 3 4

Reset video settings Jazz Postal code

3 3 4

Ext. Device (Aux) management Rock/Pop Save to address book

2 3 4

Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV) Techno Intersection

3 3 4

Vocal City district

RADIO 3 4

Mute rear speakers Geo position

1
"Radio" Menu 2 4

Loudness Map
2 4
Waveband
2
Speed dependent volume Navigate HOME
2 3
FM
3
Reset sound settings Choose from last destinations
2 3
AM
3
Choose from address book
3
2
Manual tune NAV

Stopovers
2
2
Sound settings
1
"Navigation" Menu
Add stopover
3
Refer to the "Sound settings" menu
below. Abort guidance/Resume guidance Address input
2
3 4

Destination input Navigate HOME

2
4

1
"Sound settings" Menu Address input Choose from address book
3 4

Balance/Fader Country Choose from last destinations

2 4 4

Bass/Treble City Rearrange route

2 4 3

Equalizer Street Replace stopover

2 4 3

Linear House number Delete stopover

3 4 3

262
 Recalculate Semi-dynamic
3 4

Fast route Dynamic

4 4

1
"Phone" menu
Short route Avoidance criteria
4 3

Optimized route Avoid motorways Dial number

2
4 4

POI search Avoid toll roads Dial from address book

2 4 2

POI nearby Avoid tunnels Call lists

3 4 2

POI near destination Avoid ferries Messages

3 4 2

POI in city Recalculate Select phone

3 3
2

POI in country
3 Telephone off
3
POI near route
ADDR
BOOK

3 Use Bluetooth phone

Route options 1
"Address book" Menu 3

2
Use internal phone
3
Route type Create new entry
3 2 Connect Bluetooth phone
3
POI near destination Show memory status
4
2
Search phone
4
Short route
4 Export address book
2
Disconnect phone
Optimized route 5
4 Delete all voice entries
2
Rename phone
Subscr. service 5
4 Delete all entries
2
Settings Delete pairing
5
2
Delete folder "My Addresses"
2
Route dynamics Delete all pairings
3 5

Traffic independent Show details

4 5

263
 Settings Search for networks Polski
2 3 4

Automatic answering system PIN settings Portuguese

3 3 4

Select ring tone Change PIN Voice control

3 3 3

Phone/Ring tone volume Activate PIN Voice control active

3 4 4

Enter mailbox number Deactivate PIN Tutorial

3 4 4

Internal phone settings Remember PIN Basics

3 3 5

Automatically accept call SIM-card memory status Examples

3 3 5

Signal waiting call (?) Tips

3 5

Show status SETUP

Speaker adaptation
3 4

3
Activate waiting call 1
"SETUP" Menu New speaker adaptation
5

Deactivate waiting call Language & Speech Delete speaker adaptation

3 5
2

Call forward (?) Menu language Voice output volume

3 3
3

Show status Deutsch Date & Time

3 2
4

Activate call forward English Set date & time

3 3
4
Deactivate call forward Date format
3 Español 3
4
Suppress own number Time format
3 Français 3
4
Select network
3 Italiano
4
Set network automatically
3 Nederlands
4
Set network manually
3

264
 Display Units
2 2

Brightness Temperature
3 3

Colour Celsius
3 4

Steel Fahrenheit
4 4

blue light (only in day mode) Metric/Imperial

4 3

Orange Ray km
4 4

Blue Flame Miles

4 4

Map colour System

3 2

Day mode for map Factory reset

4 3

Night mode for map Software version

4 3

Auto. Day/Night for map Automatic scrolling

4 3

265
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

266
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then
not function (no sound, "Waveband" to return to the waveband on which
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). the stations are stored.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
deteriorates or the stored geographical area.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent
and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after the battery charge. charge.
a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

267
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

"TA" is selected. On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
However, certain traffic traffic information. correctly (displaying of the traffic information
jams along the route are symbols on the map).
not indicated in real time.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

The time taken to calculate The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop
a route sometimes seems is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being the copying before starting the guidance function.
longer than usual. calculated.

I receive a speed camera The system announces all speed cameras positioned in a cone located Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
alert for a speed camera in front of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras located on nearby or the speed camera.
which is not on my route. parallel roads.

The speed camera The audible warning is not active. Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,
audible warning does not Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
work.

The alert volume is set to minimum. Increase the volume of the alert when passing a
speed camera.

Does the emergency call No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.
function work without a order to make an emergency call.
SIM card?

The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.

268
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The route calculation is The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation
not successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
period following the data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
insertion of a CD.

I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.

The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Peugeot Connect Media Navigation (NG4
telephone connected 3D) Increase the volume of the , to maximum
in Bluetooth mode is if required, and increase the volume of the
inaudible. telephone if necessary.

The system does not play The region protection may not be compatible. Insert DVDs which have compatible region
the DVD. protection.

I cannot copy the CD to The wrong source is selected. Change the active source to CD.
the Jukebox.

The CD is copy-protected. It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.

269
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The system does not The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
receive SMS.

The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.

I cannot update the risk The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed. Check that the medium used for the update (SD
area POIs. card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.

An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure. - Start the procedure again in full.
- Consult a PEUGEOT dealer if the problem
persists.
- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is
supplied by an official partner of PEUGEOT.

The voice frequencies The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display To activate them, press the MODE button until the
(DTMF) are not is in telephone mode. telephone is displayed on the screen.
active when I am
communicating and
I press numbers on the
keypad.

An accident area which The accident areas are displayed near a point defined on the map and in The alert may be triggered when travelling under a
does not concern me is relation to a direction of travel. road or near a road which has a speed camera.
displayed on the screen.

270
 Peugeott Connectt Navigation (RNEG)
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM FOR EUROPE BY SD CARD

CONTENTS
The Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) is protected
in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
If it is to be installed in another vehicle, contact a 01 First steps p. 272
PEUGEOT dealer for configuration of the system. 02 Steering mounted controls p. 273
03 General operation p. 274
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 277
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is 05 Traffic information p. 285
stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent 06 Radio p. 287
discharging of the battery, the Peugeot Connect p. 288
Navigation (RNEG) switches off following the activation 07 Music media players
of the Energy Economy mode.
08 Bluetooth telephone p. 291
09 Configuration p. 294
10 Screen menu map p. 295
Certain functions described in this handbook will Frequently asked questions p. 299
become available during the year.

271
 01 Peugeot Connect Navigation (RNEG) CONTROL PANEL
Engine not running:
- Short press: on/off. Long press: audio settings: front/rear Selection dial in the
- Long press: pause with CD fader, left/right balance, bass/treble, screen display and
play, mute for radio. musical ambience, loudness, automatic according to the menu.
volume, reinitialise settings. Access to the
Engine running: Short press: contextual "SETUP" menu.
- Short press: pause with CD Access to the menu or confirm. Long press: GPS
play, mute for radio. Radio Menu. Access to the Long press: contextual coverage and Access to the Phone
- Long press: reinitialise the Display the list of Music Menu. menu specific to the list demonstration Menu. Display the list of
system. stations. Display tracks. displayed. mode. calls.

Eject CD.
Adjust volume (each source
is independent, including Select previous/next radio
navigation messages and station.
alerts). Select previous CD or MP3
track.
Select previous/next line in
a list.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio Select previous/next radio
station. station in the list.
Long press: pre-set the Select previous/next MP3
current station. folder.
Select previous/next page in
a list.

Access to the "MODE" menu. Access to the Reader for Access to the ESC: abandon current operation.
Select successive display of: Navigation navigation SD Traffic Menu.
Menu. Display card only. Display the current
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation in progress), recent traffic alerts.
Telephone (if conversation in progress), Trip destinations.
computer.
Long press: Black screen (DARK).
272
 02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
RADIO: change to the next radio station
in the list.
Long press: automatic search for a
RADIO: select the previous/next pre-set higher frequency.
station. CD: select the next track.
Select the next entry in the address book. CD: continuous press: fast forward play.

Volume increase.

Change the audio source.

Start a call from the address book. Mute: press the volume
Call/End call on the telephone. increase and decrease
Press for more than 2 seconds: access to buttons simultaneously.
the address book. Restore the sound by
pressing one of the
two volume buttons.

Volume decrease.

RADIO: change to the previous radio

station in the List.
Long press: automatic search for a
lower frequency.
CD: select the previous track.
CD: continuous press: fast reverse.

273
 03 GENERAL OPERATION

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA
PLAYERS
FULL SCREEN MAP

TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)

TRIP COMPUTER

SETUP:
system language*, date and time*, display,
vehicle settings*, unit and system settings, TRAFFIC:
"Demo mode". TMC information and messages.
* Available according to model.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product. "Screen menu map" section.

274
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Zoom/Scroll TELEPHONE:
2
A press on the OK dial gives access to
short-cut menus according to the display Voice advice End call
on the screen. 1 1

Route options Hold call

1 1

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN Dial

1
PROGRESS):
Abort guidance DTMF-Tones
1
1
TRIP COMPUTER:
Repeat advice Private mode
1
1
Alert log
Block road 1 Micro off
1
1
Status of functions
1
Route info
1

Show destination
2

Trip info
2

Route type
3

Avoid
3

Satellites
3

275
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS: RADIO: FULL SCREEN MAP:

Traffic info (TA) In FM mode Abort guidance / Resume guidance

1
1 1

Play options Traffic info (TA) Set destination

1
2 1

Normal order RDS POIs nearby

2
2 1

Random track Radiotext Position info

2
2 1

Repeat folder Regional prog. Map settings

2
2 1

Scan AM Zoom/Scroll
2
2 1

Select music In AM mode

1
1

TA
2

Refresh AM list
2

FM
2

276
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the
Navigation functions.
SELECTING A DESTINATION The navigation SD card data must not be modified.
Map data updates are available from PEUGEOT dealers.

1 4 Select the "Destination input"

function and press the dial to
Press the NAV button. confirm.

Destination input

5
Once the country has been selected,
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation turn the dial and select the town
Menu function. function. Press the dial to confirm.

2 Press the NAV button again or select 6

the Navigation Menu function and Select the letters of the town one
press the dial to confirm. by one confirming each time by
pressing the dial.
Navigation Menu

3
Select the "Address input" function
and press the dial to confirm. A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
keypad.
Address input

277
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
7 9
Turn the dial and select OK. Then select "Start route guidance"
Press the dial to confirm. and the press the dial to confirm.

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly Start route guidance
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Select the route type:

8 "Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" to confirm.
and "House number" functions. It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations".

Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address
entered in a directory file. Press the dial to confirm the selection.
Peugeot Connect Navigation allows up to 500 contact files to be Map settings
recorded.
You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.
It is possible to move the map or select its orientation via the short-
cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP.
During guidance, pressing the end Press MODE until the map is displayed full screen. Press the dial
of the lighting stalk repeats the last then select "Map settings". Select "2.5D Map" or "2D Map" and in
guidance instruction. the latter case, select "North Up" or "Heading Up".

To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:
Delete entry
Delete list
278
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY
"HOME ADDRESS"

4
To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be Select your home address and confirm.
entered in the address book, for example from "Destination Then select "Edit entry" and confirm.
input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

Edit entry
1
Press the NAV button twice to display
the Navigation Menu.
5
Navigation Menu
Select "Set as home address" and
confirm to save.

2
Select "Destination input" and confirm. Set as "Home address"
Then select "Choose from address
book" and confirm.

Destination input

3 To start navigation towards "Home address", press NAV twice

Select "Address book" and confirm. to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and
Then select "Search entry (complete confirm.
address book)" and confirm. Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.

Address book

279
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The route selected by the Peugeot Connect Navigation system depends
ROUTE OPTIONS directly on the route options.
Changing these options may change the route completely.

1 5
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
Press the NAV button. This function gives access to the
"Traffic independent" or
"Semi-dynamic" options.

Route dynamics
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confirm.
6
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
Navigation Menu access to the AVOID options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries).
3
Select the "Route options" function
and press the dial to confirm. Avoidance criteria

Route options
7
Turn the dial and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
4 Select the "Route type" function account the route options selected.
and press the dial to confirm. This Press the dial to confirm.
function allows you to change the
route type.
Recalculate
Route type

280
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been
ADDING A STOPOVER selected.

1 5
Enter a new address, for example.
Press the NAV button.
Address input

2 6
Press the NAV button again or select Once the new address has been
the Navigation Menu function and entered, select OK and press the dial
press the dial to confirm. to confirm.

Navigation Menu OK

3 7
Select the "Stopovers" function and Select "Recalculate" and press the
press the dial to confirm. dial to confirm.

Stopovers Recalculate

4
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the
the dial to confirm. guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the
Peugeot Connect Navigation will always return you to the
previous stopover.
Add stopover

281
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the
(POI) vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

1 6 Select the "POI in city" function to

search for POIs in the city required.
Press the NAV button. Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
POI in city
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confirm.
Navigation Menu A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
3 Select the "POI search" function and
press the dial to confirm.

POI search 7
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
4 Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle. POI in country

POI nearby
8
5 Select the "POI near destination" Select the "POI near route" function
function to search for POIs near the to search for POIs near the route.
point of arrival of the route.
POI near route
POI near destination

282
 This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

* According to availability in the country.

283
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
To activate or deactivate vocal guidance, with guidance active and
the map displayed in the screen, press the dial and then select or
NAVIGATION SETTINGS deselect "Voice advice".
Voice advice

1 The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only
during the transmission of an alert.
Press the NAV button.
5 Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and POI categories on Map
press the dial to confirm.
6
Navigation Menu Select "Set parameters for risk
areas" for access to the "Display
on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound
3 alert" functions.
Select the "Settings" function and
press the dial to confirm.
Set parameters for risk areas
Settings

UPDATING POIs
4 Select the "Navi volume" function
and turn the dial to set the volume
of each voice synthesiser (traffic
information, alert messages…). The detailed procedure for updating POIs is available at the
following internet address: wipinforadars.co.uk.
This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.
Navi volume

284
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on
traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to
the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the
navigation map.
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a
traffic problem.
DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES

1 4 Select the "Geo. Filter" function and

Press the TRAFFIC button. press the dial to confirm.

Geo. Filter

5
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted Then select the radius of the filter in
in order of proximity. miles (km) required in accordance
with the route, press the dial to
confirm.
When all of the messages on the
2 Press the TRAFFIC button again or route are selected, the addition of a
select the Traffic Menu function and geographical filter is recommended
press the dial to confirm. (within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for
example) to reduce the number of
Traffic Menu messages displayed on the map.
The geographical filter follows the
movement of the vehicle.
3 Select the filter of your choice:
Messages on route
All warning messages
The filters are independent and their results are cumulative.
Only warnings on route We recommend a filter on the route and a filter around the vehicle of:
All messages - 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffic,
- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffic,
The messages appear on the map
and on the list. - 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).
To exit, press ESC.
285
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

1 Black and blue triangle: general information, for example: - the station transmits TA messages.
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert

messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:
1
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.

2
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

TA

3
Select Traffic Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confirm and go
to the associated settings.

286
 The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...)

06 RADIO may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This
phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

SELECTING A STATION RDS - REGIONAL MODE

1 1
Press the RADIO button to display When the current radio station is
the list of stations received locally displayed on the screen, press
sorted in alphabetical order. the dial.
Select the station required by turning
the dial and press to confirm.
2 The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
the following short-cuts:
TA

While listening to the radio, press one of the RDS

buttons to select the previous or next station on Radiotext
the list.
Regional prog.
AM

3
A long press of one of the buttons starts the Select the function required and
automatic search for a station with a lower or press the dial to confirm to gain
higher frequency. access to the corresponding settings.

RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
2 seconds to store the current station. in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
station. cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.

287
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The Peugeot Connect Navigation will only play audio files with the
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 extension ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and and the extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which 384 Kbps.
permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly. It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without
using special characters (e.g.: " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always problems.
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.

288
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC
CD, MP3/WMA CD

1 4
Select the music source required:
Press the MUSIC button. CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to
confirm. Play begins.

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under Music Menu. Press the up or down button to select
the next/previous folder.

2 Press the MUSIC button again or 6

Press one of the buttons to select a
select the Music Menu function and music track.
press the dial to confirm.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
Music Menu

3
Select the "Select music" function
and press the dial to confirm. The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 file standard.
Select music

289
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)
JACK/USB AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

1
Connect the portable device
(MP3/WMA player…) to the auxiliary
JACK socket or to the USB port,
using a suitable audio cable.

2 Press the MUSIC button then

press it again or select the Music
Menu function and press the dial to
confirm.
Music Menu

3 Select the "External device" function

and press the dial to activate it.

External device

4
Select the AUX music source and
press the dial to confirm. Play begins
automatically.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable

device.
290
 08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the
PAIRING A TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services
FIRST CONNECTION available to you.

3 For a first connection, select

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth "Search phone" and press the dial to
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect confirm. Then select the name of the
Navigation must be carried out with the vehicle stationary. The telephone.
ignition must be on.
Search phone

4 Enter the authentication code on the telephone.

The code to be entered is displayed on the screen
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more of the system.
help, ...).
Some telephones offer automatic reconnection
of the telephone every time the ignition is
switched on.
A message confirms the pairing.
1
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Pairing can also be started from the telephone (refer to the
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone instructions).
telephone instructions).
Once the telephone has been connected, Peugeot Connect
Navigation can synchronise the address book and the call list.
This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
2
To change the telephone connected,
Press the PHONE button. press the PHONE button, then select
Phone Menu and press the dial to
confirm.

291
 08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
CONNECTING A TELEPHONE manual and with your network provider for details of the services
available to you.

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention

on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth Once the telephone has been connected, Peugeot Connect
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the Peugeot Connect Navigation can synchronise the address book and the call list.
Navigation must be carried out with the vehicle stationary. This synchronisation may take a few minutes*.
The ignition must be on.

Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more 1

help, ...). When a telephone is already
connected, to change it press the
PHONE button, then select Phone
1 Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Menu and press the dial to confirm.
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the
telephone instructions).
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically. 2
A message confirms the connection. Select "Connect phone". Select
the telephone and press to confirm.

2
Connect phone
Press the PHONE button.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears

on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required for
a new connection.

292
 08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

1 1
Press the PHONE button.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display on the multifunction screen.
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
appears under Phone Menu. You can select a number and press
the dial to make the call.
2 Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" Select the Phone Menu function and
2
to refuse and confirm by pressing press the dial to confirm.
the dial.
Phone Menu
Yes No Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
3 Dial number
To hang up, press the PHONE button
or press the dial and select "End call"
then confirm by pressing the dial. It is also possible to select a number from the address book.
You can select "Dial from address book". The Peugeot Connect
Navigation can record up to 1 000 entries (telephone numbers).
End call Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than two
seconds to gain access to the address book.

It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the

vehicle as a safety measure.
Press the end of the steering mounted control to
accept the call or end the call in progress. To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold
on a call number to display a list of actions including:
Delete entry
Delete list
293
 09 CONFIGURATION
The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME language, Date & Time, Display (Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle,
Units, System.

These settings must be entered again if the battery has been 5

disconnected.

Select the "Date format" function and

1 press the dial to confirm.
Press the SETUP button.

2 6
Select the "Date & Time" function
and press the dial to confirm.
Confirm the format required using
the dial.
Date & Time Select the "Time format" function and
press the dial to confirm.

3 Select the "Set date & time" function

and press the dial to confirm.

Confirm the format required using the dial.

Set date & time
Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds gives
access to:
4 Description of the unit
Adjust the settings one by one using
the direction arrows and confirm by GPS coverage
means of the dial.
Demo mode

294
 10 SCREEN MENU MAP
Within 6 miles (10 km) Vocal
1
MAIN FUNCTION 3 4

Within 30 miles (50 km) Loudness

3 3
OPTION A
2
Within 60 miles (100 km) Speed dependent volume
3 3
option A1
3
Reset sound settings
3
option A2
3

OPTION B...
2
1
"Music" Menu RADIO

Select music 1
"Radio" Menu
2

Sound settings Waveband

1
"Traffic" Menu 2 2

Balance/Fader FM
3
Messages on route 3
2
Bass/Treble AM
3
Only warnings on route 3
2
Equalizer Manual tune
2
All warning messages 3
2
Linear Sound settings
2
All messages 4
2
Classic Balance/Fader
3
Geo. Filter 4
2
Jazz Bass/Treble
3
Within 2 miles (3 km) 4
3
Rock/Pop Equalizer
3
Within 3 miles (5 km) 4
3
Techno Linear
4 4

295
 Classic Start route guidance Rearrange route
4 4 3

Jazz Postal code Replace stopover

4 4 3

Rock/Pop Save to address book Delete stopover

4 4 3

Techno Intersection Recalculate

4
4 3

Vocal
4 City district Fast route
4 4
Loudness
3 Geo position Short route
4 4
Speed dependent volume
3
Map Optimized route
4 4
Reset sound settings
3
Navigate HOME POI search
3 2

Choose from address book POI nearby

3 3

Choose from last destinations POI near destination

1
"Navigation" Menu 3 3

TMC station information POI in city

3 3
Abort guidance/Resume guidance
2
Stopovers POI in country
Destination input 2 3
2
Add stopover POI near route
Enter new address 3 3
3

Country Address input Route options

4 2
4

City Navigate HOME Route type

4 4 3

Street Choose from address book Fast route

4 4 4

House number Choose from last destinations Short route

4 4 4

296
 Optimized route
4

Route dynamics 1
"Phone" Menu 1
"SETUP" menu
3

Traffic independent System language*

4 2 2

Semi-dynamic Dial from address book Deutsch

4 2 3

Avoidance criteria Call lists English

3 2 3

Avoid motorways Connect phone Español

4 2 3

Avoid toll roads Search phone Français

4 3 3

Avoid ferries Phones connected Italiano

4 3 3

Recalculate Disconnect phone Nederlands

3 4 3

Settings Rename phone Polski

2 4 3

Navi volume Delete pairing Portuguese

3 4 3

POI categories on Map Delete all pairings Date & Time*

3 4 2

Set parameters for risk areas Show details Set date & time
3 4 3

Display on map Settings Date format

4 2 3

Visual alert Select ring tone Time format

4 3 3

Sound alert Phone/Ring tone volume

4 3

Enter mailbox number

3
* Available according to model.

297
 Display Units
2 2

Brightness Temperature
3 3

Colour Celsius
3 4

Pop titanium Fahrenheit

4 4

Toffee Metric/Imperial
4 3

Blue steel Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)

4 4

Technogrey Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)

4 4

Dark blue Miles (Consumption: MPG)

4 4

Map colour System

3 2

Day mode for map Factory reset

4 3

Night mode for map Software version

4 3

Auto. Day/Night for map Automatic scrolling

4 3

Vehicle**
2

Vehicle information
3

Alert log
4

Status of functions
4

** The parameter settings vary according to vehicle.

298
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the Linear musical ambience and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Because of their quality level, certain
writeable CDs will not be played by the audio
system.

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

299
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). stations are stored.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. charge.
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

300
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

TA is selected. However, On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
certain traffic jams traffic information. correctly (displaying of the traffic information
along the route are not symbols on the map).
indicated in real time.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

I receive a speed camera The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone Zoom the map to view the exact position of the
alert for a camera which forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel speed camera.
is not on my route. roads.

The audible speed Audible alerts are not active. Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,
camera alert is not Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
working.

The alert volume level is set to minimum. Increase the speed camera alert volume.

The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 3 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select GPS coverage).

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.

The route is not The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the exclusion criteria.
calculated successfully. toll roads on a motorway with tolls).

301
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
time after inserting a CD. data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is activated.
- Check that your telephone is visible.

A telephone connected The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone. Increase the Peugeot Connect Navigation volume
by Bluetooth is inaudible. setting, possibly to maximum, and increase the
telephone volume level if necessary.

302
 Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH

CONTENTS

Your Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such 01 First steps p. 304
a way that it will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to
be installed in another vehicle, contact your PEUGEOT 02 Steering mounted controls p. 305
dealer for configuration of the system.
03 Main menu p. 306
04 Audio p. 307
05 Peugeot Connect USB p. 310
06 Bluetooth p. 313
07 Configuration p. 316
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations 08 Screen menu map p. 318
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
stationary. Frequently asked questions p. 323
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.

303
 01 FIRST STEPS

Audio settings: front/ Display the list of

rear fader, left/right local stations.
Select source: Select wavebands balance, bass/treble, Long press: CD
radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, USB, FM1, FM2, FMast loudness, audio tracks or MP3 folders Abandon the current
Jack connection, Streaming, AUX. and AM. ambiences. (CD/USB). operation.

TA (Traffic Announcements)
on/off.
Eject CD. Long press: PTY* (radio
Programme TYpe) mode.

Select the screen display Automatic frequency search

mode: down/up.
Date, audio functions, trip Select previous/next CD, MP3
computer, telephone. or USB track.

On/off, volume setting. Confirm.

The DARK button changes the screen display Buttons 1 to 6: Display main menu. Select next frequency down/up.
for improved driving comfort at night. Select a pre-set radio station. Select previous/next MP3 folder.
1st press: upper bar only illuminated. Long press: pre-set a station. Select previous/next folder/genre/
2nd press: black screen. artist/playlist (USB).
3rd press: return to standard display.

* Available according to version.

304
 02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set CD/MP3/USB: selection of the next
station. track.
USB: select genre/artist/folder from the CD/USB: continuous press: fast
classification list. forwards play.
Select the previous/next item in a menu. Move in the list.

Volume increase.

Change audio source. Mute: press the volume

Confirm a selection. increase and decrease
buttons simultaneously.
Call/hang up telephone.
The sound is restored
Press for more than 2 seconds: by pressing one of the
telephone main menu. two volume buttons.

Volume decrease.

Radio: automatic search for a lower

frequency.
CD/MP3/USB: selection of the previous
track.
CD/USB: continuous press: fast reverse.
Move in the list.

305
 03 MAIN MENU
TELEPHONE:
Bluetooth hands-free,
AUDIO FUNCTIONS: pairing, management
radio, CD, USB, options. of a call.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN C

TRIP COMPUTER: PERSONALISATION-

entering of distances, CONFIGURATION:
alerts, status of functions. vehicle parameters,
display, languages.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN A

For a detailed global view of the

menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section.

306
 The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)

04 AUDIO may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio system.

RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
RDS

1 1
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the SOURCE Press the MENU button. MENU

radio.

2
2 Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
Press the BAND AST button to select BAND press OK.
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
AST

3
3 Select the FM WAVEBAND
Briefly press one of the buttons to PREFERENCES function then
carry out an automatic search of the press OK.
radio stations.

4
4 Select ACTIVATE RDS then press
Press one of the buttons to carry out OK. RDS appears on the screen.
a manual search up/down for radio
frequencies.

In radio mode, press OK directly to activate/deactivate RDS mode.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
locally (30 stations maximum). LIST
REFRESH
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
To update this list, press for more conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the
than two seconds. country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. Under conditions
of very weak reception, the system may change to a regional station.

307
 04 AUDIO
CD
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
PLAYING A CD

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert Insert circular compact discs only.
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is quality of the original player.
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
message. begins automatically.

1 To play a disc which has already been

Press the TA button to activate or inserted, press the SOURCE button SOURCE

deactivate traffic messages. several times in succession and

select CD.

2
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks

on the CD.

3
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward.

308
 04 AUDIO
MP3 CD MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION INFORMATION AND ADVICE

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of several tens of music files on a single disc.
seconds, before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files
spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is
played. recommended.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
All of the files are displayed on a single level. correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always used
1 To play a disc which has already for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
been inserted, press the SOURCE SOURCE (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
button several times in succession In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
and select CD. recommended.

2
Press one of the buttons to select a The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with
track on the CD. a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using
the MP3 compilation. special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
3
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play. Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

309
 05
The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported
USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB are available from PEUGEOT dealers.

1 CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket*. The audio files are transmitted Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
1 using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
from portable equipment - digital player or a USB
memory stick - to your Peugeot Connect Sound on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
(RD5) and heard via the vehicle's speakers. is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The file formats supported are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec
2 compression), .wav and .ogg.
USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or Apple® Certain playlist formats are supported (m3u, ...).
player of generation 5 or later:
On reconnection of the previous memory stick
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT used, play is resumed automatically with the last
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported), track played.
- the Apple® player lead is essential,
- navigation through the file database is also
possible by means of the steering mounted
controls. The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
3 each time a USB memory stick is connected.
Other Apple® players of earlier generations and
players using the MTP protocol*: When connecting for the first time, the classification suggested
is by folder. When you reconnect, the classification selected
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied), previously is retained.
- navigation through the file database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.
310
 05 PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB

2 3 Press one of these buttons to gain

Press and hold LIST to display the access to the previous/next track on
different classifications. the classification list currently being
Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist, played.
press OK to select the classification Press and hold one of the buttons for
required, then press OK again to confirm. fast forward or backward play.

4 Press one of these buttons to gain

- by Folder: all folders containing audio access to the previous/next Genre,
files recognised on the peripheral Folder, Artist or Playlist on the
LIST
REFRESH

device. classification list currently being

- by Artist: all of the artist names played.
defined in the ID3 Tags, classified in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defined in
the ID3 Tags. CONNECTING AN APPLE® PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
1 The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined in
the Apple® player).
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Press LIST briefly to display the
previously selected classification.
Navigate through the list using the left/ LIST
REFRESH

right and up/down buttons. Do not connect a hard disk or USB connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could damage your
Confirm the selection by pressing OK. installation.

311
 05 PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX) ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF
JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle) THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

1
The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of
a portable device (MP3 player...).

First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Do not connect a device to both the JACK socket and the USB
port at the same time.

1 2

Connect the portable device (MP3 player…)

to the JACK socket or to the USB port, Then adjust the volume of your audio
using a suitable cable (not supplied). system.

Press the SOURCE button several SOURCE

The display and control is via the portable device.
times in succession and select AUX.

312
 06
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
SCREEN C Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which
(Available according to model and version) services are available to you.

PAIRING A TELEPHONE/FIRST CONNECTION 5 The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth in particular: Directory*, Call list, Pairing management.
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on. * If your telephone is fully compatible.

Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more 6 Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
help, ...). telephone can be connected at a time.

1 7 A virtual keypad is displayed in the

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function. screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.

2 A message is displayed in the screen of the

Press the MENU button. 8
MENU telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the
same code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
In the menu, select: If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
3
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio 9 A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the
- Bluetooth configuration
OK

screen.
- Perform a Bluetooth search The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been configured.
4 A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.
313
 06 BLUETOOTH

RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

1 An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed 1

display in the vehicle's screen. From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.

2
Select the YES tab on the display 2 Press the steering mounted control for more than
using the buttons and confirm by OK two seconds for access to your directory, then
pressing OK. navigate with the thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.

Press the steering mounted control to accept the

call. ENDING A CALL

1 During a call, press the steering mounted control

for more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.

314
 06 BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING*

3
Wireless transmission of the telephone's music files via the audio Activate the streaming source by
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate pressing the SOURCE button**.
Bluetooth profiles (Profiles A2DP/AVRCP). The tracks to be played can be
controlled as usual via the buttons on
the audio system control panel and
SOURCE

the steering mounted controls***.

1 The contextual information can be
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from displayed on the screen.
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 9 on the previous
pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle must be * Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
stationary with the key in the ignition.
** In certain cases, playing of the Audio files must be initiated from the
keypad.
*** If the telephone supports the function.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
2 menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.

315
 07 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN A

1 5

Press the MENU button. MENU

Press to confirm the selection. OK

2 6

Using the arrows, select DISPLAY Adjust the setting.

CONGIGURATION.

3 7

Press to confirm the selection. OK

Press to confirm the selection. OK

4 8

Using the arrows, select YEAR. Start again from step 1 then set
MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTES. OK

316
 07 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C

1 5

Press the MENU button. MENU

Press to confirm the selection. OK

2 6
Using the arrows, select Using the arrows, select ADJUST
PERSONALISATION DATE AND TIME.
CONFIGURATION.

3 7

Press to confirm the selection. OK

Press to confirm the selection. OK

4 8
Adjust the settings one by one
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY confirming by pressing the OK
CONFIGURATION. button. Next select the OK tab on the OK

screen then confirm.

317
 08 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME A 1
MAIN FUNCTION 1
OPTIONS
OPTION A DIAGNOSTICS
2
2

OPTION A1
3 CONSULT
3

OPTION A2
1
RADIO-CD 3
3
ABANDON
OPTION B...
2
RDS SEARCH
2

REG MODE
2
1
VEHICLE CONFIG* 1
UNITS
CD REPEAT
2
REV WIPE ACT TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/
2 2
RANDOM PLAY °FAHRENHEIT
2
GUIDE LAMPS FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L -
2
L/100 - MPG
2

* The parameters vary according to vehicle.

318
 08 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
DISPLAY ADJUST 1
LANGUAGE
YEAR FRANCAIS
2 2

MONTH ITALIANO
2 2

DATE NEDERLANDS
2 2

HOUR PORTUGUES
2 2

MINUTES PORTUGUES-BRASIL
2 2

12 H/24 H MODE DEUTSCH

2 2

ENGLISH
2

ESPANOL
2

319
 08 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display on the
screen:

RADIO CD/MP3 CD USB

activate/deactivate RDS activate/deactivate Intro activate/deactivate track repeat (of the

1 1
current folder/artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate REG mode activate/deactivate track repeat 1
1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate/deactivate radiotext 1
1

activate/deactivate random play (of the

current folder/artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play 1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
1

320
 08 SCREEN MENU MAP
PLAY MODES
MONOCHROME C
2

album repeat (RPT) 1

PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
3

Pressing the MENU button displays: activate/deactivate DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS*
4 2

track random play (RDM) DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

3 2

activate/deactivate video brightness adjustment

4 3

1
AUDIO FUNCTIONS 4
normal video

inverse video
FM BAND PREFERENCES 4
2
brightness (- +) adjustment
3
alternative frequencies (RDS)
1
TRIP COMPUTER 4

date and time adjustment

activate/deactivate ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION
3
4
2
day/month/year adjustment
regional mode (REG) Distance: x miles
4
3
3
hour/minute adjustment
activate/deactivate ALERT LOG
4
4
2
choice of 12 h/24 h mode
radio-text information (RDTXT) Diagnostics
4
3
3
choice of units
activate/deactivate STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS*
3
4
2
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
4
Functions activated or deactivated
3
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
4

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
321
 08 SCREEN MENU MAP

1
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
Bluetooth configuration
2

Connect/Disconnect a device
3

Telephone function
3

Audio Streaming function

3

Consult the paired device

4

Delete a paired device

4

Perform a Bluetooth search

4

Call
2

Calls list
3

Directory
4

Manage the telephone call

2

Terminate the current call

3

Activate private mode

3

322
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). (radio, CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The message "USB The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the memory stick.
is cut. The memory stick may be corrupt.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

323
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). stations are stored.

The traffic announcement The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do information.
not receive any traffic
information.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
displayed...).
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
1 to 2 seconds in radio permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.
mode.

With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. charge.
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.

324
 Checks...........174, 175, 177, 178
A B Child lock ...............................127
Children .................120, 124, 125
Accessories ...........................213 Battery ...........................177, 206 Child seats ............................ 116
Accessory socket, Battery, charging....................206 Child seats,
12 volt ...102, 104, 109, 110, 114 Battery, remote control ......79, 80 conventional ................ 118, 120
Access to Blind for panoramic sunroof ....108 Closing the boot.................77, 87
the 3rd row ............................71 Blinds ..................................... 115 Closing the doors...............77, 85
Adjusting headlamps .........94, 95 Bluetooth (hands-free) ... 255-257, Cold climate screen ...............212
Adjusting head 291, 292, 313 Colour screen,
restraints .........................67, 69 Bluetooth retractable .................49, 51, 53
Adjusting seat belt (telephone) ... 255-257, 291, 292 Concertina boards ... 72, 109, 110
height ..........................132, 133 Bonnet ...................................172 Connectors,
Adjusting the steering Bonnet stay............................172 audio ...103, 104, 290, 310, 312
wheel ....................................75 Boot .........................................87 Control for panoramic
Airbags ....................................36 Boot lamp ...................... 101, 115 sunroof blind .......................108
Airbags, curtain..............138, 139 Brake discs ............................178 Coolant level ....................37, 176
Airbags, front .................136, 139 Brake lamps...........................197 Coolant temperature
Airbags, lateral...............138, 139 Brake pads ............................178 indicator ................................37
Air conditioning ........................25 Brakes ...................................178 Courtesy lamps........................99
Air conditioning, Courtesy mirror ......................103
digital ..............................59, 62 Cruise control ........................154
Air conditioning, Cup holder ............. 102, 109, 110

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
manual ............................59, 60
Air filter ..................................177 C
Air flow .....................................25 Capacity, fuel tank ...................89
Air vents...................................58 CD MP3 .........................289, 309
Alarm .......................................81 Central locking ...................77, 86 D
Anti-pinch.........................83, 108 Centre console ......................104
Anti-theft ..................................78 Changing a bulb ....194, 197, 198 Date
Armrest, rear.......................... 110 Changing a fuse ....................199 (setting) .......260, 294, 316, 317
Assistance call .......................224 Changing a wheel ..........188, 190 Daytime running
Audible warning .....................128 Changing a wiper lamps ....................93, 194, 196
Audio/video sockets...............254 blade .............................98, 208 Deactivating ESP...................131
Audio streaming Changing Deactivating the passenger
(Bluetooth) ..........................315 the date ...............260, 294, 317 airbag ..................................136
Automatic illumination Changing the remote Deadlocking .............................77
of headlamps ..................91, 94 control battery .......................79 Defrosting ..........................60, 61
Automatic operation Changing the time...260, 294, 317 Demisting.................................60
of hazard warning lamps .....128 Checking levels .............176, 177 Dials and gauges .....................27
Automatic rain sensitive Checking the engine Diesel additive level ...............177
windscreen wipers ..........96, 98 oil level ..................................40 Dimensions ............................221
Auxiliary socket..............290, 312 Checking tyre pressures Dipped beam ...........91, 194, 195
Auxiliary sockets ............254, 310 (using the kit) ......................179 Dipstick ............................40, 176
325
 Directional lighting ...................95
Direction F H
indicators ............128, 194, 197
Distance alert.........................150 Filling with fuel ...................89, 90 Halogen headlamps...............194
Doors .......................................85 Fitting a wheel .......................192 Hands-free kit ........291, 292, 313
Doors emergency Fitting roof bars...................... 211 Hazard warning lamps ...........128
control ...................................87 Fittings, boot .................. 109, 110 Head-up display.....148, 152, 154
Door trays ..............................102 Flashing indicators.................128 Headlamp adjustment........94, 95
Dynamic emergency Foglamps, rear ........................92 Headlamps, directional ....95, 194
braking ................................143 Folding the rear seats ...69, 71, 72 Headlamp wash .......................97
Front foglamps.........92, 194, 196 Headlamp wash reservoir ......176
Front seats...................65, 66, 68 Head restraints, front ...............67
Fuel..............................25, 89, 90 Head restraints, rear ................69
Fuel consumption ....................25 Heated seats ...........................67
Fuel filler cap ...........................89 Heating ........................25, 59, 60
E Fuel filler flap .....................89, 90 Height and reach adjustment,
Eco-driving ..............................25 Fuel gauge...............................89 steering wheel .......................75
Economical driving .................25 Fuel tank ............................89, 90 High load retaining net........... 112
Economy mode......................208 Fusebox, dashboard ..............199 Hill start assist .......................145
Electric window Fuses .....................................199 Hooks ............................ 110, 114
controls .................................83 Horn .......................................128
Electronic engine
immobiliser ......................78, 80
ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Electronic stability control

(ESC) ..................................130 G
Emergency boot G.P.S. ............................238, 277
I
release ..................................88 Gearbox, automatic .......161, 178 Identification plates ................222
Emergency call ..............224, 225 Gearbox, electronic Indicator lamps, status.............30
Emergency warning gear control .........157, 164, 178 Indicators, direction ...............128
lamps ..................................128 Gearbox, Inflating accessories
Energy economy manual ................156, 164, 178 (using the kit) ......................179
mode ...................................208 Gear efficiency Inflating tyres ...........................25
Engine, Diesel ........90, 173, 175, indicator ..............................156 Inputs for audio
214, 215, 216, 217, 220 Gear lever ................................25 system ........254, 290, 310, 312
Engine, petrol ..................90, 174 Gear lever, Instrument panel lighting .........41
Engine compartment .....174, 175 automatic gearbox ..............161 Instrument panels ..............27, 28
Engine compartment Gear lever, electronic gear Instrument panel
fusebox ...............................199 control gearbox ...................157 screen ...........................27, 156
Engine oil level Gear lever, Intelligent Traction
indicator ........................40, 176 manual gearbox ..................156 Control ................................130
Engines..........................214, 216 Glove box ......................102, 103 Interior fittings ........................102
Environment ......................25, 80 Grab handles .........................102 Interior mood lighting .............100
ESC/ASR ...............................130 Guidance .......................238, 277 ISOFIX child seats ......... 123-125
ESP/ASR ...............................131 Guide-me-home.......................94 ISOFIX mountings .................123
326
J M P
Jack ...............................188, 190 Main beam ............... 91, 194-196 Paint colour code ...................222
JACK socket ..........104, 310, 312 Maintenance ............................25 Panoramic glass
Jukebox (copy) ......................252 Map reading lamps ..................99 sunroof ................................108
Jukebox (playing) ..................253 Markings, identification ..........222 Parking brake ........................178
Mat.........................................105 Parking brake,
Menu, main ............................306 electric ........................140, 143
Mini fuel level ...........................89 Parking sensors,
Mirror, rear view .......................75 rear .....................................167
K Mirrors, door ............................74 Parking space
Misfuel prevention ...................90 sensor ................................169
Keeping children Modularity, seats......................73 Particle emission
safe ............. 116, 124, 125, 136 Motorway function filter .............................177, 178
Key with remote (direction indicators) ...........128 Passenger compartment
control ....................... 76-78, 80 Mountings for ISOFIX seats ....123 filter .....................................177
MP3 CD .........................289, 309 PEUGEOT call
Multimedia, rear .............104, 107 button ..................................225
Music media players ......250, 288 PEUGEOT CONNECT
L ASSISTANCE .....................224
Peugeot Connect Media
Labels, identification ..............222 Navigation (NG4 3D) .....28, 51,

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lamps, warning and 53, 55, 227, 230,
indicator ....................29, 32, 33 N 233, 261
Level, brake fluid ...................176 Peugeot Connect
Level, headlamp wash .....97, 176 Navigation......................238, 277
Net ......................................... 111 Navigation (RNEG) ........49, 53,
Level, power steering fluid .....176 Number plate lamps ..............198 274, 295
Levels and checks ......... 174-177 PEUGEOT
Lighting ..................................101 CONNECT SOS..........224, 225
Lighting, guide-me home.....93, 94 Peugeot Connect
Lighting, interior ...............99, 100 Sound (RD5) ................46, 303,
Lighting bulbs 318, 320
(replacement) ......194, 197, 198
O PEUGEOT services ...............225
Lighting control stalk ................91 Oil filter ..................................177 PIN code ................................258
Lighting dimmer .......................41 Oil level ............................40, 176 Player, CD MP3 .............289, 309
Loading ...................... 25, 73, 211 Opening the bonnet ...............172 POIs
Load reduction mode .............208 Opening the boot ...............76, 87 (updating) ............................245
Load space cover ........... 109-111 Opening the doors .............76, 85 Port, USB...............104, 310, 312
Locating your vehicle ...............77 Opening the panoramic Priming the fuel
Locking from the inside............86 sunroof blind .......................108 system ................................173
Long objects, Opening the retractable screen ...53 Protecting children ........ 116, 120,
transporting .....................68, 73 Operation indicator 123-125, 136
Luggage retaining net ............ 113 lamps ..................29, 30, 32, 34 Puncture ........................179, 185
327
 Stop & Start ..........57, 61, 63, 89,
R S 164, 172, 177, 206
Storage... 102, 104, 106, 109, 110
Radio .....................249, 287, 307 Safety for children....83, 120, 127 Storage box ...........................103
RCA sockets ..........................254 Screen, Storage drawer ......................106
Reading lamps, rear ................99 colour 16/9 ...233, 261, 274, 295 Storage wells ................. 109, 110
Rear foglamp .................197, 198 Screen, Stowing rings ................. 109, 110
Rear screen monochrome .......306, 318, 320 Sun visor................ 102, 103, 115
(demisting) ............................61 Screen, monochrome C...........55 Synchronising
Recharging the battery ..........206 Screen, multifunction (with audio the remote control .................79
Reduction of electrical equipment) ....44, 46, 49, 51, 53 System, navigation ........238, 277
load .....................................208 Screen, multifunction Systems, ASR and ESP ........131
Reinitialising the electric (without audio equipment) ....42
windows ................................83 Screen-wash reservoir...........176
Reinitialising the remote Screen menu
control ...................................79 map .............261, 295, 318, 320
Remote control ............76, 77, 80 Screenwash, front....................97 T
Removable screen Screenwash fluid level .....97, 176
(snow shield) .......................212 Seat adjustment...........65, 66, 69 Table of weights .....215, 217, 220
Removing a wheel .................192 Seat belts....... 110, 132, 133, 135 Tables, aircraft .......................106
Removing the mat .................105 Seat configurations ..................73 Tables of engines...........214, 216
Repair kit, puncture .......179, 185 Seats, electric ..........................66 Tables of fuses.......................199
Replacing bulbs .....194, 197, 198 Seats, rear ...................69, 71, 72 Tank, fuel .................................90
Technical
ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Replacing fuses .....................199 Serial number, vehicle ...........222

Replacing the air filter ............177 Service indicator ......................38 data ............. 214-216, 217, 220
Replacing the oil filter ............177 Servicing ..................................25 Telephone ............. 225, 255-257,
Replacing the particle Setting 291, 292
emission filter ......................178 the clock ......260, 294, 316, 317 Telephone, hands-free .... 255-257
Replacing the passenger Short-cut menus ....234, 275, 276 Temperature, coolant ...............37
compartment filter ...............177 Sidelamps ................ 91, 194-197 Temperature control
Replacing wiper Side repeater .........................196 for heated seats ....................67
blades ...........................98, 208 SIM card ........................103, 258 Temporary tyre repair kit ........179
Resetting the service Spare wheel...................188, 190 Third brake lamp....................198
indicator ................................39 Spectacles storage ................102 TMC (Traffic info) ...........247, 285
Resetting the trip recorder .......41 Speed limiter..........................152 Tools ..............................188, 190
Rev counter .............................27 Speedometer ...........................27 Torch .............. 101, 109, 110, 115
Reversing lamp......................197 Spotlamps, side .....................100 Total distance recorder ............41
Rigid panel...............................71 Stability control (ESP)............131 Towbar ...................................210
Risk areas Starting Towed loads...........215, 217, 220
(update) ......................245, 284 the vehicle .............78, 157, 161 Towing another vehicle ..........209
Roof bars ............................... 211 Steering mounted controls, Traction control
Routine checks ..............177, 178 audio ...........................232, 305 (ASR) ..................................131
Running out of fuel Stopping Traffic information
(Diesel) ...............................173 the vehicle .............78, 157, 161 (TA) .............248, 286, 287, 308
328
 Traffic information
(TMC) ..........247, 248, 285, 286 W
Trip computer ..............54, 55, 57
Trip distance recorder ..............41 Warning lamps .............30, 33, 34
Tyre pressures .......................222 Wash-wipe, rear ......................97
Tyres ........................................25 Weights..................215, 217, 220
Tyre under-inflation Welcome lighting .............93, 100
detection .............................129 Window controls ......................83
Wiper, rear ...............................97
Wiper control stalk ............. 96-98
Wipers ...............................96, 98

U
Under-inflation
(detection) ...........................129 X
Under floor storage ................ 114
Unlocking .................................76 Xenon headlamps..................194
Unlocking from
the inside ..............................86
Update risk areas ..........245, 284
Updating POIs .......................245
Updating
the date ...............260, 316, 317

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Updating
the time ...............260, 316, 317
USB
(Peugeot Connect) ......104, 310

V
Vehicle
identification ........................222
Ventilation .......................... 58-60
Voice commands ...................230

329
 EXTERIOR
Accessories ................................ 213
Roof bars, finishers..................... 211
Remote control key..................76-80
Panoramic sunroof ..................... 108
- opening/closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting
- battery Door mirrors.................................. 74

Fuel tank ..................................89-90

Exterior welcome lighting.............. 93
Misfuel prevention ........................ 90
Door mirror spotlamps ................ 100
Directional lighting ...................91-95
Headlamp height adjustment..... 94, 95
Wiper .......................................96-98 Very cold climate screen............. 212
Changing a wiper blade ........ 98, 208 Changing
bulbs .................................194-196
- front lamps
Boot .........................................87-88 - foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
- opening/closing
- emergency release
Temporary puncture Parking
repair kit ............................179-187 space sensors ...................169-170
Changing a wheel ................188-193
- tools
- removing
VISUAL SEARCH

Doors .......................................85-88
- opening/closing
- central locking
Parking sensors ...................167-168 - emergency control
Towing .................................209-210 Alarm .......................................81-82
Towbar ................................. 210-211 Electric windows ......................83-84

Changing
rear bulbs ..........................197-198 ESC:
- rear lamps ABS, EBA, ASR, CDS .......130-131
- 3rd brake lamp Tyre under-inflation detection ..... 129
- number plate lamps Tyre pressures ............................ 222
- foglamps
INTERIOR
Rear seats, 2nd row ................69-70
Rigid panel.................................... 71 Front seats...............................65-67
Access to the 3rd row ................... 71 - manual
Rear seats, 3rd row .................72-73 - electric
Side blinds .................................. 115 - head restraints
- lumbar
- heated
Seat in table position,
transporting long objects ............ 68

Boot fittings .......................... 109-115

- load space roller cover
- high load retaining net
- luggage retaining net
- hooks
- 12 V accessory socket
- storage box Airbags ................................136-139
Boot lamp, Deactivating the passenger's
torch ................................. 101, 115 front airbag ....................... 117, 137

Mats ............................................ 105

VISUAL SEARCH
Storage drawer ........................... 106

Rear multimedia ......................... 107

Seat belts.............................132-135

Conventional child seats...... 116-122

ISOFIX child seats ...............123-126 Aircraft style table ....................... 106
Child lock .................................... 127 Storage compartments
under the footwells ................... 106

331
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Courtesy lamps..................... 99, 100
Seat belt/passenger's front airbag Peugeot Connect Media
warning lamps display...... 133, 137 navigation (RT6) .....227-270
Setting the date/time ...... 260
Rear view mirror ........................... 75
Peugeot Connect Navigation
(RNEG) ...............271-302
Sun visor..................................... 103 Setting the date/time ... 294
Peugeot Connect
Sound (RD5) .......303-324
Setting the date/time.... 316, 317

Dashboard fuses .................199-202 Ventilation ................................58-59

Rear ventilation............................. 59
Manual air conditioning............60-61
Digital air conditioning .............62-64
Opening the bonnet .................... 172 Demist/defrost .............................. 61

6-speed manual gearbox ............ 156

Gear efficiency indicator ............. 156
Interior Electronic gear control
fittings........................102-103, 105
VISUAL SEARCH

gearbox .............................157-160
- sun visor Automatic
- driver's storage compartments gearbox .............................161-163
- glove box
- mat Stop & Start .........................164-166
Hill start assist ............................ 145
Eco-driving...............................25-26

12 V accessory socket................ 104

Electric parking
brake ..................140-144, 146-147
Centre console ........................... 104
Peugeot Connect USB .... 112, 288, 310

332
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Instrument panels,
screens .................................27-29
Warning lamps .........................29-37
Multifunction screens ...............42-52 Indicators .................................37-40
- Screen A Gear efficiency indicator ............ 156 Head-up display...................148-149
- Screen C Buttons ................................... 39, 41 Distance alert.......................150-151
- 16/9 colour screen - check/service indicator/trip
- 16/9 high definition colour screen distance recorder
Retractable - lighting dimmer
screen ........................................ 53
Screen A:
setting the date/time............. 43, 45

Wiper controls..........................96-98
Lighting controls ......................91-95 Trip computer ..........................54-57
Direction indicators ..................... 128

Ignition switch ............................... 78

Hazard warning lamps ................ 128
Head-up display...................148-149
Distance alert.......................150-151
Door mirrors.................................. 74
Electric windows, deactivating ....83-84

VISUAL SEARCH
Speed limiter........................152-153
Cruise control ......................154-155
Switch panel ................................. 16
Stop & Start .........................164-166

Panoramic sunroof ..................... 108

Headlamp height adjustment..... 94, 95

Steering wheel adjustment ........... 75

Horn ............................................ 128

333
 TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE

12 V battery .........................206-207
Load reduction, economy mode ... 208
Engine compartment
fuses .........................199, 203-205
Running out of fuel, Diesel ......... 173

Petrol weights ............................. 215

Diesel weights .....................217-219
Checking levels ...................176-177 Diesel weights - LCV .................. 220
- oil
- brake fluid
- power steering fluid
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid

Checking components .........177-178

- air filter
- passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- brake pads/discs
VISUAL SEARCH

Changing bulbs....................194-198 Identification markings ................ 222

- front
- rear

Opening the bonnet .................... 172 Dimensions ................................. 221

Under the bonnet, petrol ............. 174
Under the bonnet, Diesel ............ 175
Petrol engines............................. 214
Diesel engines ............................ 216

334
This handbook describes all of the Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by
equipment available in the whole application of the provisions of the Eu-
range. ropean regulation (Directive 2000/53)
Your vehicle will be fitted with some relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it
of this equipment described in this achieves the objectives set by this reg-
document, depending on its trim level, ulation and that recycled materials are
version and the specification for the used in the manufacture of the products
country in which it is sold. that it sells.
The descriptions and illustrations Reproduction or translation of all or part
are given without any obligation. Au- of this handbook is prohibited without
tomobiles PEUGEOT reserves the written authorisation from Automobiles
right to modify the technical specifi- PEUGEOT.
cations, equipment and accessories
without having to update the current
handbook.
This document is an integral part of For any work on your vehicle, use a
your vehicle. It should be passed on qualified workshop that has the techni-
to the new user in the event of sale cal information, competence and equip-
or transfer. ment required, which a PEUGEOT
dealer is able to provide.

Printed in the EU Anglais

05-11
 Anglais
www.peugeot.com AN. 11588.0031